1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or
3364 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3369 style only that one time.
3370 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3372 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3390 manual for information on how to use it.
3393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 Each class has a default set of options.
3399 Here's a quick table describing them:
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3409 \begin_layout Standard
3411 \begin_inset Tabular
3412 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3413 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3879 \begin_layout Standard
3880 You're probably also wondering what
3881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3885 \begin_inset space ~
3889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3893 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3894 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3899 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3904 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3914 headings, there are also
3922 headings, and so on.
3923 We will describe these headings fully in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "subsec:Headings"
3937 \begin_layout Subsection
3939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3941 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset Index idx
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_layout Standard
3969 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3986 \begin_inset space ~
3991 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3993 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3994 doesn't support special options you want to
3995 use for your document.
3996 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3997 -class and its options, you have to read
4001 \begin_layout Standard
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4018 \begin_inset space ~
4023 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4024 You can choose between the following five options:
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 Use default page style of current class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 No page numbers or headings.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 \begin_layout Labeling
4055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4060 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4061 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4062 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4063 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4066 \begin_layout Labeling
4067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4073 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4079 \begin_inset Index idx
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4090 How they are defined is explained in section
4091 \begin_inset space ~
4095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4097 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4104 \begin_layout Standard
4105 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4106 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4112 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4119 \begin_layout Subsection
4120 Paper Size and Orientation
4121 \begin_inset Index idx
4124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 Document ! Paper size
4131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4133 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4141 You can find the following options in the menu
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4155 \begin_inset Index idx
4158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4167 \begin_layout Labeling
4168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4177 What size paper to print on.
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4209 US letter, US legal, US executive
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Itemize
4225 \begin_layout Labeling
4226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4231 To choose whether to output as
4242 \begin_layout Labeling
4243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4247 \begin_inset space ~
4252 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4253 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Margins"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4288 Paper margins are set in the menu
4290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4294 \begin_inset Index idx
4297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Standard
4307 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4308 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4309 the paper format and the font size into account.
4312 \begin_layout Subsection
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4317 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 That includes the paragraph environments.
4324 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4325 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4326 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4328 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4337 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4339 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4340 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4341 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4344 \begin_layout Section
4345 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4346 \begin_inset Index idx
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 Paragraph ! Indentation
4358 \begin_layout Subsection
4360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4362 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4371 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4376 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4377 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4378 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4382 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4388 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4389 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4390 language than English.
4392 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4396 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4397 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4398 into \SpecialChar LyX
4400 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4403 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4405 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4406 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4407 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4415 goes to produce a printable file.
4420 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4422 gives you the ability globally to change
4426 these pre-coded spacings.
4427 We will explain more later.
4430 \begin_layout Subsection
4431 Paragraph Separation
4432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4434 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4439 \begin_inset Index idx
4442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4443 Paragraph ! Separation
4451 \begin_layout Standard
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4467 \begin_inset space ~
4474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4478 \begin_inset Index idx
4481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4487 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4490 \begin_layout Subsection
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 dialog and toggle the
4508 \begin_inset space ~
4513 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4516 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4520 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4521 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4527 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4530 \begin_layout Subsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4563 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4567 \begin_inset space ~
4576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 \begin_inset Index idx
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 installed to use this feature.
4598 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4607 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4608 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4611 \begin_layout Section
4612 Paragraph Environments
4613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4615 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4624 Paragraph ! Environments
4630 \begin_inset Index idx
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4634 Paragraph environments|(
4642 \begin_layout Subsection
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4647 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4650 \begin_layout Standard
4659 } \SpecialChar ldots
4669 \begin_inset Newline newline
4672 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4674 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4676 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4685 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 A paragraph environment is simply a
4690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4697 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4698 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4699 scheme, labels, and so on.
4700 Additionally, you can
4701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4708 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4709 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4710 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4711 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4713 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4715 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4719 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4720 \begin_inset Graphics
4721 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4727 at the left end of the toolbar.
4729 will change the environment of the
4733 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4734 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4735 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4748 create a new paragraph using the
4752 paragraph environment.
4754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4761 because if you are in one of these environments:
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Itemize
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4808 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4812 , rather than resetting it to
4817 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4818 \begin_inset space ~
4822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4824 reference "sec:Nesting"
4831 \begin_layout Subsection
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 The default paragraph environment is
4841 It creates a plain paragraph.
4843 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4844 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4845 this manual) are in the
4852 \begin_layout Standard
4853 You can nest a paragraph using the
4857 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4865 \begin_layout Subsection
4867 \begin_inset Index idx
4870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4880 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4881 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4890 for thanks or contact information.
4891 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4892 places all of this on a separate page
4893 along with today's date.
4894 For other types of documents, the title
4895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4902 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4906 \begin_layout Standard
4908 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4922 Here's how you use them:
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the title of your document in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 Put the author name in the
4941 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4943 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4949 Note that using this environment is optional.
4950 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4951 will automatically insert today's date.
4952 If you don't want a date, use the option
4954 Suppress default date on front page
4958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4961 \begin_inset space ~
4969 \begin_layout Standard
4970 You can use footnotes to insert
4971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4978 or contact information.
4981 \begin_layout Subsection
4983 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4995 name "subsec:Headings"
5002 \begin_layout Standard
5003 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5005 takes care of the numbering for you.
5008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5010 \begin_inset Index idx
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 Section headings ! Numbered
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Enumerate
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5071 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5072 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5073 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5076 \begin_layout Standard
5077 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5078 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5079 You group the book into chapters.
5081 does a similar grouping:
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5089 is divided into either
5100 \begin_layout Itemize
5112 \begin_layout Itemize
5124 \begin_layout Itemize
5136 \begin_layout Itemize
5148 \begin_layout Itemize
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5169 Not all document types use the
5173 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5178 is the top-level heading.
5186 \begin_layout Standard
5191 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5192 labels it with its number,
5193 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5195 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5209 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5213 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5221 \begin_layout Standard
5222 The unnumbered section headings have a
5223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5230 at the end of their name.
5231 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5232 the table of contents, see section
5233 \begin_inset space ~
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5247 Changing the Numbering
5248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5250 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5259 in the Table of Contents.
5260 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5262 Just as certain classes start with
5276 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5286 This is something you can change.
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5296 \begin_inset Index idx
5299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5312 \begin_inset space ~
5317 you will see two counters.
5322 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5323 numbers a section heading.
5324 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5329 Short Titles of Headings
5330 \begin_inset Index idx
5333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5334 Section headings ! Short titles
5340 \begin_inset Argument 1
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5352 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5361 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5362 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5363 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5368 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5369 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5370 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5371 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5376 \begin_inset space ~
5382 This will insert a box labeled
5383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5387 \begin_inset space ~
5391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5394 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5395 This also works for captions inside floats.
5396 There can only be one short title per title.
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5407 \begin_layout Standard
5408 The following information applies to all section headings:
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5424 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5433 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5447 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5448 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5449 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5450 the text they contain.
5451 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5459 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5462 \begin_layout Standard
5463 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5472 when you start a new paragraph.
5473 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5477 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5478 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5479 have to change back to the
5483 environment yourself.
5486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5495 \begin_inset Index idx
5498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5508 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5509 time for the differences.
5518 are identical except for one difference:
5522 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5531 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5534 \begin_layout Standard
5535 Here's an example of the
5548 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5550 See – no indentation!
5554 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5555 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5556 the other paragraph.
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5560 Here's another example, this time in the
5567 \begin_layout Quotation
5573 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5574 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5575 the first line, then
5579 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5583 you were quoting other text.
5586 \begin_layout Quotation
5587 Here's a new paragraph.
5588 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5589 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5592 \begin_layout Standard
5593 As the examples show,
5597 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5598 They should put quotes in the
5603 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5607 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5622 \begin_inset Index idx
5625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5641 \begin_layout Standard
5646 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5652 \begin_inset Newline newline
5655 Which I did not rehearse!
5659 It could be much worse.
5660 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5662 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5663 indented a bit more than the first.
5664 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 And make things look fine
5674 \begin_inset Newline newline
5680 arg "newline-insert newline"
5686 \begin_layout Standard
5691 does not indent both margins.
5692 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5693 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5696 arg "newline-insert newline"
5702 \begin_layout Subsection
5704 \begin_inset Index idx
5707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5723 \begin_layout Standard
5725 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5735 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5736 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5745 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5746 lets you provide your own label.
5747 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5748 describing some general features of all four of them.
5751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5755 \begin_layout Standard
5756 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5758 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5759 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5768 reset the environment to
5772 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5773 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5774 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5778 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5782 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5789 \begin_layout Standard
5790 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5791 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5792 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5794 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5795 you read all of section
5796 \begin_inset space ~
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5802 reference "sec:Nesting"
5809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5811 \begin_inset Index idx
5814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5831 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5835 paragraph environment.
5836 It has the following properties:
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 The items can have any length.
5857 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5858 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5865 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 environment inside another
5874 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5887 \begin_layout Itemize
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5895 reference "sec:Nesting"
5899 for a full explanation of nesting.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5904 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5913 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5916 \begin_layout Standard
5917 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5918 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5921 \begin_layout Itemize
5922 The label for the first level
5926 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the second level is a dash.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back out to the third level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the second level.
5955 \begin_layout Itemize
5956 Back to the outermost level.
5959 \begin_layout Standard
5960 These are the default labels for an
5965 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5970 dialog in the submenu
5975 \begin_inset Index idx
5978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5984 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5988 \begin_layout Standard
5989 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5990 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5992 \begin_inset space ~
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5998 reference "sec:Nesting"
6005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6007 \begin_inset Index idx
6010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6019 name "sec:Enumerate"
6026 \begin_layout Standard
6031 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6032 It has these properties:
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 environment resets the counter to one.
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6073 Items can have any length.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6084 \begin_layout Enumerate
6085 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6098 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6100 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6101 labels the four different levels in an
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 The first level of an
6113 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the third level
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the second level.
6147 \begin_layout Enumerate
6148 Back to the outermost level.
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6156 environment, see section
6157 \begin_inset space ~
6161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6163 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6168 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 There is more to nesting
6177 environments than we've stated here.
6178 You should read section
6179 \begin_inset space ~
6183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6185 reference "sec:Nesting"
6189 to learn more about nesting.
6192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6194 \begin_inset Index idx
6197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6207 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6211 list has no fixed label.
6212 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6221 of the first line as the label.
6225 \begin_layout Description
6226 Example: This is an example of the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6239 \begin_layout Standard
6241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6248 it is meant that the first usage of the
6252 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6254 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6262 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6282 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6286 for more information.) Here is an example:
6289 \begin_layout Description
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6294 Example: This one shows how to use a
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6309 \begin_layout Description
6310 Usage: You should use the
6314 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6315 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6317 It's not a good idea to use a
6321 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6322 You're better off using
6334 paragraphs into them.
6337 \begin_layout Description
6338 Nesting: You can nest
6342 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6348 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6349 them from the first line.
6352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6354 \begin_inset Index idx
6357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6366 \begin_layout Standard
6371 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6372 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6376 \begin_layout Standard
6385 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6387 Here are its properties:
6390 \begin_layout Labeling
6391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6393 \begin_inset space ~
6396 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6405 of each line as the item label.
6410 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6411 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6412 space as described above.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6417 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6418 uses different margins for the item label and the
6419 body of the item text.
6420 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6421 label width plus a little extra space.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width \SpecialChar LyX
6432 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6433 If the label width is larger, the label
6434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6441 into the first line.
6442 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6443 margin of the rest of the item text.
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6449 \begin_inset space ~
6452 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6457 environment has the same left margin.
6458 \begin_inset Newline newline
6461 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6466 \begin_inset space ~
6471 dialog (toolbar button
6474 arg "layout-paragraph"
6481 \begin_inset space ~
6486 determines the default label width.
6487 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6496 multiple times instead.
6497 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6507 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6510 \begin_inset space ~
6515 every time you alter a label in a
6520 \begin_inset Newline newline
6523 The predefined default width is the length of
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6532 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_layout Standard
6543 list the same way as the
6547 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6553 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6562 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6563 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6565 \begin_inset space ~
6569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6571 reference "sec:Nesting"
6575 to learn about nesting.
6578 \begin_layout Standard
6579 There is yet another feature of the
6583 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6584 left-justifies the item labels by
6586 You can use additional
6590 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6591 justifies the item label.
6596 are documented in section
6597 \begin_inset space ~
6601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6603 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6608 Here are some examples:
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 Left The default for
6620 \begin_layout Labeling
6621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6629 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6632 \begin_layout Labeling
6633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6645 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6648 \begin_layout Subsection
6650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6652 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6657 \begin_inset Index idx
6660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6670 The features described in this section require that the module
6672 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6674 is loaded in the document settings.
6675 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6681 \begin_inset Index idx
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6695 Custom Enumerate Lists
6696 \begin_inset Index idx
6699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6708 \begin_layout Standard
6710 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6716 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6717 There you add the command
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6728 \begin_layout Standard
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6741 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6742 Code, look at section
6743 \begin_inset space ~
6747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6749 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6762 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6769 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6770 For capital Roman numerals replace
6782 in the command above.
6783 For Arabic numerals use
6791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6798 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 You can only number 26
6824 \begin_inset space ~
6827 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6837 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6840 \begin_layout Standard
6841 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 \begin_inset Argument 1
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_inset Argument 1
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6906 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_inset Argument 1
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Enumerate
6935 \begin_inset Argument 1
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6965 For this list these commands were used:
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6995 \begin_inset Newline newline
7005 \begin_layout Standard
7012 makes the label emphasized and
7021 \begin_layout Standard
7022 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7030 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7031 lists until you change the definition.
7039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7041 \begin_inset Index idx
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7045 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7053 \begin_layout Standard
7054 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7057 \begin_layout Enumerate
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_inset Note Note
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 goes back to default numbering
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7100 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7110 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7111 to indicate that it is a resumed
7112 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7113 , but in the output.
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7134 \begin_layout Standard
7135 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7137 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7138 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7139 of a normal enumeration.
7140 There, insert the command
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7154 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_layout Standard
7167 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7170 \begin_layout Enumerate
7171 \begin_inset Argument 1
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7190 This enumeration starts at 4
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset Index idx
7198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7210 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7217 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 with standard spacing
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7224 Add there the command
7228 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_inset Argument 1
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Itemize
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7263 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_inset Index idx
7273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7281 For more information see its documentation,
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7293 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7295 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7296 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7300 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_inset Argument 1
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7315 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7328 \begin_layout Enumerate
7329 with negative indentation
7332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7333 Further Customization
7334 \begin_inset Index idx
7337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7338 Lists ! Customization
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 You can also change the style of description lists.
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 changes the description label font, the command
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 sets the list style.
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7372 An example where the command
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7380 itshape, style=nextline
7383 \begin_layout Standard
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 \begin_inset Argument 1
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7402 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7404 itshape, style=nextline
7414 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7415 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7419 \begin_layout Description
7421 \begin_inset space ~
7424 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7425 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7426 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7429 \begin_layout Standard
7430 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7436 \begin_inset Index idx
7439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 For more information see its documentation
7448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7458 \begin_layout Subsection
7460 \begin_inset Index idx
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7477 Address: An Overview
7480 \begin_layout Standard
7481 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7482 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7490 \begin_inset space ~
7496 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7497 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7498 gags on the document.
7499 In contrast, you can use the
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7511 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7512 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7517 Of course, you're not limited to using
7524 \begin_inset space ~
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7538 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7539 some European academic papers.
7542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7546 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7558 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7559 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7568 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7569 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7570 Here's an example of each:
7573 \begin_layout Right Address
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 When is it? What is today?
7589 \begin_layout Standard
7593 \begin_inset space ~
7599 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7601 the largest block of text on a single line.
7602 Here's an example of the
7609 \begin_layout Address
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Where do I send this
7615 \begin_inset Newline newline
7618 Your post office and country
7621 \begin_layout Standard
7622 As you can see, both
7629 \begin_inset space ~
7634 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7639 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7640 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7646 This makes sense, since
7654 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7655 Thus, you have to use
7662 arg "newline-insert newline"
7667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7679 ) to start a new line in an
7686 \begin_inset space ~
7694 \begin_layout Subsection
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7699 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7700 or list of references.
7702 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7727 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7741 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7742 The book document classes ignores the
7746 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7750 in a letter document class.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment does several things for you.
7759 First, it puts the centered label
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7768 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7770 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7771 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7772 the subsequent text.
7773 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7775 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7784 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7785 The new paragraph will still be in the
7790 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7791 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7795 \begin_inset Float figure
7800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_inset Graphics
7803 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7816 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7837 \begin_layout Standard
7838 We would love to demonstrate the
7842 environment, but since this document is in the
7843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7850 class, we can't do this.
7851 We inserted it therefore as figure
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7858 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7863 If you have never heard of an
7864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7871 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset Index idx
7879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7888 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment is used to list references.
7901 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7902 only use it at the end of the document.
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 When you first open a
7919 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7920 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7936 depending on the document class.
7937 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7938 Each paragraph of the
7942 environment is a bibliography entry.
7947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7948 Each new paragraph is still in the
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7956 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7957 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7959 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7961 handling, have a look at section
7962 \begin_inset space ~
7966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7968 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7975 \begin_layout Subsection
7976 Special Environments
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7981 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7982 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7990 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8003 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8016 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8023 key as a fixed whitespace.
8027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8063 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8066 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8069 arg "newline-insert newline"
8086 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8087 So, when you finish using the
8092 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8093 Also, you can nest the
8098 environment inside of others.
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8109 arg "newline-insert newline"
8112 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8117 \begin_inset space \space{}
8127 arg "newline-insert newline"
8133 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 arg "newline-insert newline"
8147 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8155 You must put at least one
8159 in any line you want blank.
8160 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8164 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8169 since that will insert
8174 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8177 arg "self-insert \""
8183 \begin_layout Standard
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8204 printf("Hello World!
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 This is just the standard
8219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8230 \begin_layout Standard
8236 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8238 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8239 as if you used a typewriter.
8240 \begin_inset Index idx
8243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8244 Paragraph environments|)
8249 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8252 Program Code Listings
8257 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8269 \begin_inset Index idx
8272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8286 environment is similar to the
8291 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8292 computer console text.
8297 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8311 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8312 you can have empty lines.
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 have a certain language and a text style
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8331 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8332 and \SpecialChar TeX
8336 \begin_layout Standard
8337 Because of these properties
8341 works like a typewriter.
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 The following 2 lines are empty:
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8363 \begin_layout Verbatim
8364 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8369 \begin_layout Standard
8374 environment is identical to
8378 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8379 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8386 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8390 \begin_layout Section
8391 Nesting Environments
8392 \begin_inset Index idx
8395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 Nesting ! Environments
8402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8411 \begin_layout Subsection
8415 \begin_layout Standard
8417 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8419 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8421 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8423 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Enumerate
8457 \begin_layout Standard
8458 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8459 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8461 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8479 \begin_inset space ~
8484 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8486 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8489 arg "depth-increment"
8495 arg "depth-decrement"
8509 arg "depth-increment"
8515 arg "depth-decrement"
8519 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8520 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8526 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8527 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8528 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8529 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8533 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8535 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8537 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8540 \begin_layout Subsection
8541 What You Can and Can't Nest
8544 \begin_layout Standard
8545 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8546 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8551 than a simple yes or no.
8552 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Completely unnestable
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8569 \begin_layout Standard
8570 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8571 environments have them:
8574 \begin_layout Description
8575 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8576 Can't nest into them.
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Description
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8616 Nestable You can nest them.
8617 You can nest other things into them.
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Description
8684 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8685 You can't nest anything into them.
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_inset space ~
8777 \begin_layout Itemize
8784 \begin_layout Standard
8785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8803 \begin_inset space ~
8806 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8807 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8808 nested section headings violate this.
8816 \begin_layout Subsection
8817 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8818 \begin_inset Index idx
8821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8830 \begin_layout Standard
8831 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8832 affected by nesting anyhow.
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8858 Figures and tables in
8862 are not affected by this.
8867 Have a look at section
8868 \begin_inset space ~
8872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8874 reference "sec:Floats"
8878 for more information about
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8887 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8888 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 of its own, it behaves just like a
8902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8909 paragraph environment.
8910 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8915 Here's an example with a table:
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8923 \begin_layout Enumerate
8924 This is (a) and it's nested.
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8937 \begin_inset Tabular
8938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8939 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9044 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9047 \begin_layout Enumerate
9052 \begin_layout Enumerate
9053 This is (a) and it's nested.
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9064 \begin_layout Standard
9066 \begin_inset Tabular
9067 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9068 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9161 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9181 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9184 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9187 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 This is (a) and it's nested.
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9205 \begin_inset Tabular
9206 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9207 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9294 \begin_layout Standard
9295 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 \begin_layout Standard
9315 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9321 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9322 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9326 \begin_layout Subsection
9327 Usage and General Features
9330 \begin_layout Standard
9331 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9332 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9341 is the innermost possible depth.
9342 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9345 \begin_layout Enumerate
9346 level #1 – outermost
9350 \begin_layout Enumerate
9355 \begin_layout Enumerate
9360 \begin_layout Enumerate
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9370 \begin_layout Itemize
9379 \begin_layout Standard
9380 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9381 both of them in the example.
9382 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9392 For example, if we tried to nest another
9397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9404 , we would get errors.
9407 \begin_layout Subsection
9409 \begin_inset Index idx
9412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9421 \begin_layout Standard
9422 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9423 We have several examples of nested environments.
9424 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9443 \begin_layout Labeling
9444 \labelwidthstring MMM
9445 #2-a This is level #2.
9446 We created it by using
9449 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9455 arg "depth-increment"
9462 \begin_layout Labeling
9463 \labelwidthstring MMM
9464 #3-a This is level #3.
9465 This time, we just enter
9472 arg "depth-increment"
9476 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9480 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9486 arg "depth-increment"
9493 \begin_layout Standard
9498 environment, nested inside of
9499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9507 So, it's at level #4.
9508 We did this by entering
9511 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9517 arg "depth-increment"
9520 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9525 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9541 \begin_layout Standard
9546 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9555 \begin_layout Labeling
9556 \labelwidthstring MMM
9557 #4-a This is level #4.
9561 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9564 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9569 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9573 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9578 keep nesting things inside
9579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9600 and this is level #6.
9601 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9607 #5-b Back to level #5.
9611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9617 arg "depth-decrement"
9624 \begin_layout Labeling
9625 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9635 arg "depth-decrement"
9638 , we're back at level #4.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #3-b Back to level #3.
9645 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #2-b Back to level #2.
9656 \begin_layout Labeling
9657 \labelwidthstring MMM
9658 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9659 After this sentence, we will enter
9663 and change the paragraph environment back to
9670 \begin_layout Standard
9671 We could have also used the
9687 environment in place of the
9692 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9696 Example 2: Inheritance
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9700 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9712 arg "depth-increment"
9716 \begin_inset Newline newline
9719 which, we will change to the
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 environment, at level #2.
9735 \begin_layout Enumerate
9736 Notice how the nested
9740 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9744 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9749 We ended this example by entering
9754 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9758 and reset the nesting depth by using
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9768 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9777 \begin_inset Argument 1
9780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9781 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9789 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 This is level #1, in an
9794 paragraph environment.
9795 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9799 \begin_layout Enumerate
9804 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9810 arg "depth-increment"
9814 Now, what happens if we nest an
9818 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9819 label be? An asterisk?
9823 \begin_layout Itemize
9833 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9834 So, its label is a bullet.
9835 (We got here by using
9838 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 arg "depth-increment"
9847 , then changing the environment to
9855 \begin_layout Itemize
9856 Here's level #4, produced using
9859 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9865 arg "depth-increment"
9869 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9874 \begin_layout Enumerate
9877 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9882 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9886 , because we are in the
9894 environment (that is, it is an
9909 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9915 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9919 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9926 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9929 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 arg "depth-decrement"
9936 to decrease the depth after the next
9939 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9956 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9970 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9975 reset the counter for the label.
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9983 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9989 arg "depth-decrement"
9992 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9993 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9994 into the twofold-nested
10002 \begin_layout Enumerate
10003 The same thing happens if we do another
10006 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10012 arg "depth-decrement"
10015 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10018 \begin_layout Standard
10019 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10024 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10035 The number of other
10039 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10046 The same rule applies for the
10050 environment, as well.
10053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10054 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10057 \begin_layout Enumerate
10058 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10059 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10060 the same detail with how we did it.
10069 \begin_layout Standard
10077 arg "depth-increment"
10084 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10085 the example in parentheses someplace.
10086 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10087 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10088 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10101 \begin_layout Verse
10102 Now we will add verse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10106 It will get much worse.
10107 \begin_inset Newline newline
10117 arg "depth-increment"
10127 \begin_layout Verse
10128 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10133 \begin_inset Newline newline
10139 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10147 \begin_layout Verse
10148 Here comes a table:
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10161 \begin_inset Tabular
10162 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10163 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10250 \begin_layout Verse
10254 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10264 arg "depth-increment"
10270 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10276 \begin_inset Newline newline
10284 arg "depth-decrement"
10291 \begin_layout Enumerate
10296 : level #1) This is another item.
10297 Note that selecting a
10301 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10302 3 times to put the table inside the
10310 \begin_layout Quotation
10311 We're now ending the
10315 list and changing to
10320 We're still at level #1.
10321 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10322 The next set of paragraphs is a
10323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10330 We will nest both the
10337 \begin_inset space ~
10342 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10346 for the letter body.
10350 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10353 to preserve the depth.
10354 Remember that you need to use
10357 arg "newline-insert newline"
10360 to create multiple lines inside the
10367 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_layout Right Address
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10383 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 \begin_layout Address
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10402 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10403 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10404 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10405 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10406 as soon as possible.
10407 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10412 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10413 with your order, along with payment.
10416 \begin_layout Quotation
10417 We thank you again for your patience.
10420 \begin_layout Address
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10429 \begin_layout Quotation
10430 That ends that example!
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10434 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10435 gives you a lot of power with just
10437 We could have easily nested an
10458 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10461 \begin_layout Subsection
10463 \begin_inset Index idx
10466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10467 Nesting ! Separation
10473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10475 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10485 For example you need two different enumerations:
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 \begin_inset Separator plain
10509 \begin_layout Itemize
10515 \begin_layout Standard
10516 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10534 \begin_layout Standard
10535 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10536 list item and use the menu
10538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Separated <Name> Above
10543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Separated <Name> Below
10547 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10548 ) and before or behind it the
10550 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10555 (red arrow in LyX).
10556 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10557 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10564 arg "paragraph-break"
10571 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10574 \begin_layout Section
10575 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10576 \begin_inset Index idx
10579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10588 \begin_layout Standard
10589 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10590 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10592 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10593 be broken at the end of a line.
10594 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10598 \begin_layout Subsection
10600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10602 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10620 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10621 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10622 ) not to break the line at
10624 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10627 \begin_layout Quote
10628 Further documentation is given in section
10629 \begin_inset Newline newline
10633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10635 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10643 \begin_layout Standard
10644 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10659 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10668 A protected space is set with
10670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10681 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10687 \begin_layout Subsection
10689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10691 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10696 \begin_inset Index idx
10699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10700 Spacing ! Horizontal
10708 \begin_layout Standard
10709 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10716 The length units are listed in Appendix
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10723 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10734 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10739 \begin_inset Index idx
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 Spaces ! Inter-word
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10753 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10754 at the ends of sentences.
10755 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10756 automatically takes care about this.
10757 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10758 followed by a period; see section
10759 \begin_inset space ~
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10765 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10770 To insert a normal space, select
10772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10775 \begin_inset space ~
10783 arg "space-insert normal"
10789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10793 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10798 \begin_inset Index idx
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10810 \begin_layout Standard
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10819 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10828 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10829 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10830 inside abbreviations:
10833 \begin_layout Quote
10835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10839 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 or between values and units.
10844 Compare for example this:
10845 \begin_inset Newline newline
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10853 \begin_inset Newline newline
10856 10 kg (normal space
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10860 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10873 arg "space-insert thin"
10879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10883 \begin_layout Standard
10884 You can also insert the following space types:
10887 \begin_layout Description
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10896 space A line with a
10897 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10901 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10905 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10908 negative thin space between the arrows.
10911 \begin_layout Description
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10920 space A line with a
10921 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10925 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10929 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10932 negative medium space between the arrows.
10935 \begin_layout Description
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10944 space A line with a
10945 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10949 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10953 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10956 negative thick space between the arrows.
10959 \begin_layout Description
10961 \begin_inset space ~
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10969 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10973 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10977 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10981 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 em) space between the arrows.
10991 \begin_layout Description
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11001 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11005 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11009 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 em) space between the arrows.
11023 \begin_layout Description
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11045 \begin_inset space ~
11049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11052 em) space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11065 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11070 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11077 cm space between the arrows.
11080 \begin_layout Standard
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11088 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11092 lists the different space sizes.
11095 \begin_layout Standard
11096 \begin_inset Float table
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11107 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11111 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset Tabular
11122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11241 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11400 \begin_inset Index idx
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11414 feature for adding extra space
11415 in a uniform fashion.
11416 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11417 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11418 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11419 equally between themselves.
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11423 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11426 \begin_layout Quote
11428 This is on the left side
11429 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11432 This is on the right
11435 \begin_layout Quote
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11448 \begin_layout Quote
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11465 \begin_layout Standard
11466 That was an example in the
11472 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11480 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11483 is one in a standard paragraph.
11484 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11488 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11492 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11495 \begin_inset space ~
11500 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11541 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11551 \begin_layout Standard
11553 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11557 \begin_inset space ~
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11565 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11575 \begin_layout Standard
11576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11584 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11588 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11590 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11591 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11595 option in the space dialog.
11603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11607 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11626 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11630 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11633 What is correct English?:
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset space ~
11645 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11646 \begin_inset Newline newline
11650 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11661 \begin_inset Newline newline
11665 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11676 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11684 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11701 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11708 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11725 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11734 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11735 That is why it is named
11736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11744 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11745 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11749 \begin_layout Subsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11782 There you find the following sizes:
11785 \begin_layout Standard
11798 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11799 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11804 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11809 \begin_inset space ~
11815 \begin_inset Index idx
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 Document ! Settings
11824 for the paragraph separation.
11825 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11836 \begin_layout Standard
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11852 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11857 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11858 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11867 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11876 s are described in section
11877 \begin_inset space ~
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11883 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11892 If there are several
11896 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11897 You can therefore use
11901 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11904 \begin_layout Standard
11909 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11910 \begin_inset space ~
11914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11916 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11923 \begin_layout Standard
11924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11935 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11947 \begin_layout Subsection
11948 Paragraph Alignment
11949 \begin_inset Index idx
11952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 Paragraph ! Alignment
11961 \begin_layout Standard
11962 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11967 dialog (toolbar button
11970 arg "layout-paragraph"
11974 There are five possibilities:
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12019 \begin_layout Itemize
12027 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12033 \begin_layout Itemize
12041 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12048 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12049 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12050 the left and right margins.
12051 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 This paragraph is right aligned,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is centered,
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12066 this one is left aligned.
12069 \begin_layout Subsection
12071 \begin_inset Index idx
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12075 Page breaks ! Forced
12081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12083 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12091 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12092 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12093 force a page break where you want one.
12094 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 is good at page breaking.
12096 Only if you use a lot of
12100 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12105 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12106 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12110 have to change the page breaking.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12116 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12127 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12132 \begin_inset space ~
12137 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12139 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12140 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12143 \begin_layout Standard
12144 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12145 at the top of a page.
12146 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12148 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12149 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12150 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12154 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12158 to learn more about
12165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12169 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12174 \begin_inset Index idx
12177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 Page breaks ! Clear
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12188 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12189 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12190 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12191 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12195 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 \begin_inset space ~
12206 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12215 \begin_inset space ~
12220 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12221 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12224 \begin_layout Subsection
12226 \begin_inset Index idx
12229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12238 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12245 \begin_layout Standard
12246 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12248 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12265 arg "newline-insert newline"
12269 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12286 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12289 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12291 This is useful to avoid
12292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12299 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12303 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12306 very good at line breaking.
12307 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12308 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12309 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12315 reference "sec:Quote"
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12322 reference "sec:Verse"
12327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12329 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12336 \begin_layout Subsection
12338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12340 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12345 \begin_inset Index idx
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 \begin_layout Standard
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12377 \begin_inset space ~
12382 you can insert horizontal lines.
12383 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12384 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12385 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12388 \begin_layout Standard
12390 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12401 \begin_layout Section
12402 Characters and Symbols
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12407 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12408 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12416 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12420 for information on how this is done.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12429 dialog via the menu
12431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12438 \begin_layout Standard
12439 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12448 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12450 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12458 \begin_layout Section
12459 Fonts and Text Styles
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12462 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12469 \begin_layout Subsection
12471 \begin_inset Index idx
12474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12483 \begin_layout Standard
12484 There are two types of fonts:
12487 \begin_layout Description
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset Index idx
12496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12502 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12507 characters) in the font.
12508 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12509 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12510 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12511 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12512 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12513 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12514 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12519 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12520 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12521 sizes than at small ones.
12522 \begin_inset Newline newline
12536 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_layout Description
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12559 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12560 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12561 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12562 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12563 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12564 image manipulation program.
12565 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12566 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels high up to 34
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12574 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12575 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12576 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12578 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12579 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12580 \begin_inset Newline newline
12583 Bitmap fonts are named
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12591 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12596 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12597 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12598 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12599 use scalable fonts.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12607 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12614 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12615 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12616 font to emphasize text, you use an
12617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12625 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12627 In \SpecialChar LyX
12628 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12632 \begin_layout Subsection
12635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12637 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12644 \begin_layout Standard
12645 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 used its own fonts.
12647 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12648 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12653 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12654 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12655 to a word processor.
12656 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12657 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 files are very portable across
12659 different machines.
12660 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 has increased a lot
12662 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12665 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12673 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12678 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12679 code in the document
12680 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12685 engines that are also able directly
12686 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12688 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12690 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12692 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12693 that is installed on your system.
12694 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12697 \begin_layout Standard
12698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12706 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12707 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12715 \begin_layout Subsection
12716 Document Font and Font size
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12719 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_inset Index idx
12737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 You can set the document fonts in the
12749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12753 \begin_inset Index idx
12756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12757 Document ! Settings
12767 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12768 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12780 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12782 \begin_inset space ~
12785 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12793 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12794 This requires that you use
12806 as the output format, i.
12807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12811 \begin_inset space \space{}
12814 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12815 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12816 installed (see section
12817 \begin_inset space ~
12821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12823 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12828 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12830 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12831 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12836 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12837 cannot determine the family.
12838 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12839 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12842 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12845 \begin_layout Standard
12846 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12847 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12852 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12858 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12860 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12862 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12865 font encoding, this is
12866 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12867 , depending on the document language,
12870 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12871 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12895 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12896 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12904 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12918 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12939 European Computer Modern
12942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12950 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12953 \begin_layout Standard
12958 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12959 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12964 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12972 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12978 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12979 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12982 \begin_layout Itemize
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12991 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13009 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13010 community in order to replace
13014 as the default font.
13015 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13016 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13033 One difference is improved kerning.
13041 \begin_layout Itemize
13042 If you do not like the look of
13050 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13055 \begin_inset space ~
13061 \begin_inset space ~
13071 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13072 \begin_inset space ~
13075 serif and typewriter fonts,
13079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13080 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13087 \begin_inset space ~
13096 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13101 \begin_inset space \space{}
13109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13113 \begin_inset space \space{}
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13137 but you can also select your own.
13138 \begin_inset Newline newline
13141 The differences between roman,
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13153 fonts are explained in section
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13160 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13165 \begin_inset Newline newline
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13176 was originally designed for newspapers.
13177 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13178 into the small newspaper columns.
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13187 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13190 \begin_layout Standard
13191 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13204 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13209 depends on the class you are using.
13210 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13213 \begin_layout Standard
13214 Note that the font size is the
13219 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13220 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13221 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13222 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13225 \begin_inset space ~
13231 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13238 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13245 \begin_layout Standard
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13254 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13259 serif or typewriter.
13264 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13274 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13277 \begin_layout Standard
13282 LaTeX font encoding
13284 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13285 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13291 \begin_inset Index idx
13294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13302 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13310 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13317 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13318 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13319 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13323 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13331 \begin_layout Standard
13332 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13334 Use Old Style Figures
13338 Use True Small Caps
13341 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13344 Use Old Style Figures
13346 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13348 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13356 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13360 Use True Small Caps
13362 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13363 of scaled capitals.
13364 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13365 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13368 \begin_layout Standard
13373 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13374 a font to display the script characters.
13378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13379 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13385 \begin_inset Index idx
13388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13395 So this has no effect for the document language
13411 \begin_layout Standard
13414 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13416 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13417 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13423 \begin_inset Index idx
13426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13428 packages ! microtype
13437 \begin_layout Standard
13440 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13442 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13447 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13448 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13454 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13461 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13471 \begin_layout Standard
13472 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13476 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13484 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13489 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13490 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13492 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13497 dialog, see section
13498 \begin_inset space ~
13502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13504 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13516 \begin_layout Subsection
13520 \begin_layout Standard
13521 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13522 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13524 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13525 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13526 choose a math font in the dialog
13528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13532 \begin_inset Index idx
13535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13536 Document ! Settings
13542 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13543 automatically selects a math font.
13544 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13554 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13565 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13566 document font is available.
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13570 Note that the math font will not be used for
13574 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13580 or by the insertion of the command
13587 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13592 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13593 while the math characters do not.
13595 \begin_inset space ~
13598 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13601 \begin_inset space ~
13609 \begin_inset space ~
13614 in the document font settings.
13617 \begin_layout Standard
13618 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13619 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13620 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13621 font (in most cases
13622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13628 \begin_inset space ~
13634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13637 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13638 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13658 \begin_layout Subsection
13660 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13670 name "subsec:charstyles"
13677 \begin_inset Index idx
13680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13687 \begin_inset Index idx
13690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13700 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13701 automatically changes the
13702 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13705 style for certain paragraph environments.
13707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13708 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13710 This is where we meet the concept of
13716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13722 \begin_layout Standard
13724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13753 e., available with all document classes.
13754 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13758 for specific purposes.
13759 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13762 \begin_layout Standard
13764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13765 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13775 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13779 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13792 — you customized the
13797 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13798 among them, encourage the use of
13810 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13817 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13822 Rather than fiddling with
13826 , they encourage the use of
13830 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13835 \begin_inset Quotes els
13839 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13842 ), not their form (
13843 \begin_inset Quotes els
13847 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13851 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13852 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13853 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13854 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13855 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13856 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13862 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13866 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13867 With a semantic markup (such as
13871 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13876 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13878 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13879 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13885 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13886 by \SpecialChar LyX
13892 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13895 Builtin Text Styles
13896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13898 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13908 The two builtin text styles can be
13909 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13917 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13918 both of these styles
13921 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13929 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13935 \begin_layout Standard
13940 style, do one of the following:
13943 \begin_layout Itemize
13944 click on the toolbar button
13953 \begin_layout Itemize
13954 use the key binding
13961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13965 \begin_layout Itemize
13967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13975 arg "dialog-show character"
13981 arg "dialog-show character"
13984 ) as described in section
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13991 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14000 \begin_layout Standard
14001 These commands are all toggles.
14006 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14009 \begin_layout Standard
14010 One typically uses the
14014 style for proper names.
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14023 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14029 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14033 \begin_layout Standard
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14040 is producing text in
14044 , but the definition can be changed.
14049 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14061 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14068 \begin_layout Itemize
14069 clicking on the toolbar button
14078 \begin_layout Itemize
14079 using the keybindings
14086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14090 \begin_layout Itemize
14092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14100 arg "dialog-show character"
14106 arg "dialog-show character"
14109 ) as described in section
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14116 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14125 \begin_layout Standard
14130 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14134 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14137 packages use a different font
14138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14139 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14145 \begin_layout Standard
14146 We've been using the
14150 style all over the place in this document.
14151 Here's one more example:
14154 \begin_layout Quotation
14158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14160 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14166 \begin_layout Standard
14167 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14168 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14169 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14170 the common tendency to overuse
14171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14182 \begin_layout Standard
14184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14185 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14186 only as font changes and integrated in the
14194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14197 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14206 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14213 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14215 \begin_inset space ~
14218 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14220 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14226 arg "dialog-show character"
14232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14234 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14240 arg "dialog-show character"
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14250 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14254 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14261 \begin_layout Standard
14263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14264 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14266 \begin_inset space ~
14270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14272 reference "subsec:Modules"
14279 ), or local layout settings (see section
14280 \begin_inset space ~
14284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14286 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14291 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14295 markup for specific functions.
14296 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14301 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14311 \begin_inset Quotes els
14315 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14321 \begin_layout Standard
14323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14324 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14332 \begin_layout Standard
14334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14335 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14340 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14341 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14342 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14347 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14348 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14361 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14362 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14363 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14364 \begin_inset Flex Code
14367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14378 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14383 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14392 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14406 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14407 on screen their formal appearance.
14412 \begin_layout Subsection
14414 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14426 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14434 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14442 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14447 \begin_inset Index idx
14450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14459 \begin_layout Standard
14460 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14464 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14473 the properties of text passages
14474 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14478 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14479 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14480 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14481 from ordinary dialog.
14482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14486 \begin_layout Standard
14488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14489 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14490 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14491 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14492 the properties of the respective text passages.
14497 comes in as a last resort.
14502 \begin_layout Standard
14503 Before we document how to
14504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14505 use custom character style
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14507 tweak the text properties
14509 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14510 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14516 \begin_inset Newline newline
14519 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14520 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14523 \begin_layout Standard
14525 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14526 use custom character styles
14527 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14528 tweak text properties
14531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14536 \begin_inset space ~
14539 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14547 arg "dialog-show character"
14552 dialog or press the toolbar button
14555 arg "dialog-show character"
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14563 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14564 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14569 property that you can choose.
14570 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14573 \begin_inset space ~
14578 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14591 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14592 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14593 environments all at once.
14596 \begin_layout Standard
14598 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14600 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14603 properties, and their options (in addition to
14606 \begin_inset space ~
14612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14624 \begin_layout Labeling
14625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 The possible options are:
14643 \begin_layout Labeling
14644 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14649 This is the Roman font family.
14650 Normally a serif font.
14651 It's also the default family.
14661 \begin_layout Labeling
14662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14666 \begin_inset space ~
14673 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14685 \begin_layout Labeling
14686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14693 This is the Typewriter font family.
14699 arg "font-typewriter"
14705 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14709 \begin_layout Standard
14711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14712 The general differences of these families are:
14715 \begin_layout Itemize
14717 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14722 fonts use characters with serifs.
14723 These are the small
14724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14731 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14732 The following example shows the difference:
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14737 \begin_inset Newline newline
14742 text without serifs
14745 \begin_inset Newline newline
14748 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14749 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14756 \begin_layout Itemize
14758 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14763 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14764 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14765 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14768 \begin_layout Itemize
14770 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14783 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset Newline newline
14805 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14821 \begin_inset Note Note
14824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14826 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14827 For more on phantoms see section
14828 \begin_inset space ~
14832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14834 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14853 \begin_layout Labeling
14854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14859 This corresponds to the print weight.
14864 \begin_layout Labeling
14865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14870 This is the Medium font series.
14871 It's also the default series.
14874 \begin_layout Labeling
14875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14882 This is the Bold font series.
14895 \begin_layout Labeling
14896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14901 As the name implies.
14906 \begin_layout Labeling
14907 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14912 This is the Upright font shape.
14913 It's also the default shape.
14916 \begin_layout Labeling
14917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14927 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14932 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14937 s the Italic font shape
14943 \begin_layout Labeling
14944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14951 This is the Slanted font shape
14953 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14954 , this is different from italic).
14957 \begin_layout Labeling
14958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14962 \begin_inset space ~
14969 This is the Small caps font shape
14976 \begin_layout Labeling
14977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14982 Alters the text color.
14983 Note that not all DVI
14984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14986 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14989 viewers are able to display colors.
14991 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
14995 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15004 , which means that the document default color set in
15006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15105 \begin_inset Index idx
15108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_layout Labeling
15118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15123 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15124 the language of the document.
15125 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15127 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15130 in blue to indicate the change
15131 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15132 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15136 \begin_inset Newline newline
15139 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15141 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15142 When using the spell checking (see section
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15149 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15153 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15156 \begin_inset Newline newline
15159 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15161 Exclude from Spellchecking
15164 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15167 \begin_layout Labeling
15168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15173 Alters the size of the font.
15175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15184 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15185 document font size.
15186 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15187 the details, but a general description of what
15193 \begin_layout Labeling
15194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15215 arg "font-size tiny"
15221 \begin_layout Labeling
15222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15243 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15249 \begin_layout Labeling
15250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15271 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15277 \begin_layout Labeling
15278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15299 arg "font-size small"
15305 \begin_layout Labeling
15306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 It's also the default size.
15324 arg "font-size normal"
15330 \begin_layout Labeling
15331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15352 arg "font-size large"
15358 \begin_layout Labeling
15359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15380 arg "font-size larger"
15386 \begin_layout Labeling
15387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 arg "font-size largest"
15414 \begin_layout Labeling
15415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15436 arg "font-size huge"
15442 \begin_layout Labeling
15443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 arg "font-size giant"
15470 \begin_layout Labeling
15471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15476 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 arg "font-size increase"
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15508 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15528 arg "font-size decrease"
15535 \begin_layout Standard
15540 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15541 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15543 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15544 — use those instead.
15545 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15548 \begin_layout Labeling
15549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15555 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15561 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15562 change a few other things at the character level
15563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15564 have text passages being underlined
15568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15569 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15570 days, when you could not change fonts.
15571 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15572 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15573 because some people
15577 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15584 \begin_layout Labeling
15585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15594 This is text with emphasize on
15597 This might seem like the same as
15601 , but it is actually a bit different.
15607 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15609 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15614 \begin_layout Labeling
15615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15622 Don't use underlining.
15627 \begin_layout Labeling
15628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15630 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15653 arg "font-underline"
15659 \begin_inset Newline newline
15663 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15666 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15667 when you could not change fonts.
15668 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15669 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15670 because some people
15674 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15679 \begin_layout Labeling
15680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15686 \begin_inset space ~
15695 This is text with Double under
15696 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15698 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15707 arg "font-underunderline"
15711 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15713 \begin_inset Newline newline
15716 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15717 about double underbar
15722 \begin_layout Labeling
15723 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15727 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15729 \begin_inset space ~
15738 This is text with Wavy under
15739 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15750 arg "font-underwave"
15754 \begin_inset Newline newline
15757 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15758 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15764 \begin_layout Labeling
15765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15772 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15778 \begin_layout Labeling
15779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15781 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15786 Don't use strikethrough.
15789 \begin_layout Labeling
15790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15808 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15811 Single strikethrough
15819 arg "font-strikeout"
15823 \begin_inset Newline newline
15826 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15827 changed in the meantime.
15830 \begin_layout Labeling
15831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15833 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15841 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15847 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15857 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15863 \begin_inset Newline newline
15866 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15870 \begin_layout Standard
15872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15873 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15874 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15875 \begin_inset space ~
15879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15881 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15888 \begin_layout Itemize
15890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15897 This is text with emphasize on
15902 \begin_layout Itemize
15906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15913 This is text with Noun on.
15915 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15922 , this is a logical attribute.
15923 Normally it's equivalent to
15926 \begin_inset space ~
15936 \begin_layout Standard
15937 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15940 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15945 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15946 chosen a new character style
15947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15948 applied a text property
15951 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15954 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15956 \begin_inset space ~
15959 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15967 arg "dialog-show character"
15975 arg "dialog-show character"
15978 ) dialog, the settings are
15979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15983 You can activate the
15984 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15986 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15987 last applied properties
15989 by using the toolbar button
15992 arg "textstyle-apply"
15996 The button lets you apply
15997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
15998 your custom character style
15999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16002 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16006 To completely reset the
16007 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16009 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16010 text properties of a selection
16012 to the default, use
16020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16021 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16022 you just set the shape to
16023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16041 \begin_inset space ~
16055 \begin_layout Standard
16057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16058 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16066 \begin_inset space ~
16078 \begin_layout Itemize
16080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16093 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 \begin_inset Newline newline
16115 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 \begin_inset Note Note
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 For more on phantoms see section
16134 \begin_inset space ~
16138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16140 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16150 \begin_inset Newline newline
16156 \begin_layout Itemize
16158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16163 fonts use characters with serifs.
16164 These are the small
16165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16172 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16173 The following example shows the difference:
16174 \begin_inset Newline newline
16178 \begin_inset Newline newline
16183 text without serifs
16186 \begin_inset Newline newline
16189 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16190 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16197 \begin_layout Itemize
16199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16204 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16205 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16206 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16211 \begin_layout Standard
16213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16221 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16222 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16225 \begin_inset space ~
16230 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16231 the property to be removed.
16232 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16233 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16234 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16252 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16253 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16261 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16265 \begin_inset space ~
16270 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16281 If you, for example, set
16282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16300 \begin_inset space ~
16305 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16314 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16324 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16325 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16328 \begin_layout Section
16329 Printing and Previewing
16332 \begin_layout Subsection
16336 \begin_layout Standard
16337 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16338 using \SpecialChar LyX
16339 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16340 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16341 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16342 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16344 Additional Features
16349 \begin_layout Standard
16351 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16354 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16355 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16356 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16359 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16360 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16361 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16362 to turn your writing into printable output.
16363 This happens in two stages:
16366 \begin_layout Enumerate
16367 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16368 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16370 a file with the extension,
16371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16385 \begin_layout Enumerate
16386 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16387 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16388 to use the commands in the
16392 file to produce printable output.
16395 \begin_layout Subsection
16396 Output file formats
16397 \begin_inset Index idx
16400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16409 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16417 Simple text (ASCII)
16418 \begin_inset Index idx
16421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 File formats ! ASCII
16430 \begin_layout Standard
16431 This file type has the extension
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_layout Standard
16456 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16458 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16459 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16461 \begin_inset space ~
16467 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16468 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16469 bibliography (section
16470 \begin_inset space ~
16474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16476 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16481 If your document includes such material, use
16483 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16484 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16486 \begin_inset space ~
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16502 \begin_inset space ~
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16512 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16513 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16519 \begin_inset Index idx
16522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 This file type has the extension
16534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16545 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16548 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16549 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16550 -Errors or to process it manually
16551 with console commands.
16552 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16554 's temporary directory whenever you
16555 view or export your document.
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 -file using the menu
16562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16563 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16567 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16568 export variants are explained in section
16569 \begin_inset space ~
16573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16575 reference "subsec:Export"
16582 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16584 \begin_inset Index idx
16587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16597 This file type has the extension
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16618 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16619 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16620 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16624 \begin_layout Standard
16625 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16626 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16627 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16628 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16629 when you view the DVI.
16630 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16633 \begin_layout Standard
16634 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16636 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16637 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16642 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16643 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16645 \begin_inset space ~
16651 The latter option uses the program
16653 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16659 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16662 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16663 font access (see section
16664 \begin_inset space ~
16668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16670 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16675 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16676 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16683 \begin_inset Index idx
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16687 File formats ! PostScript
16695 \begin_layout Standard
16696 This file type has the extension
16697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16709 PostScript was developed by the company
16713 as a printer language.
16714 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16716 PostScript can be seen as a
16717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16720 programming language
16721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16724 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16729 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16736 \begin_inset Index idx
16739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 packages ! pstricks
16751 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16754 \begin_layout Standard
16755 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16759 Encapsulated PostScript
16760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16763 (EPS, file extension
16764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16776 As \SpecialChar LyX
16777 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16778 convert them in the background to EPS.
16779 If, for example, you have 50
16780 \begin_inset space ~
16783 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16788 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16789 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16791 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16792 EPS to avoid this problem.
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16798 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16799 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16817 \begin_inset Index idx
16820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 This file type has the extension
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16847 Portable Document Format
16848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 was derived from PostScript.
16856 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16865 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16866 looks exactly the same.
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16874 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16878 (JPG, file extension
16879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16906 Portable Network Graphics
16907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16910 (PNG, file extension
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16923 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16924 converts them in the
16925 background to one of these formats.
16926 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16927 will slow down your workflow.
16928 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16931 \begin_layout Standard
16932 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16934 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16940 \begin_layout Description
16942 \begin_inset space ~
16945 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16949 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16952 \begin_layout Description
16954 \begin_inset space ~
16961 ) This uses the program
16963 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16966 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16969 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16972 is a new engine, derived from
16976 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16977 access (see section
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16984 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16989 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16990 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16995 \begin_layout Description
16997 \begin_inset space ~
17004 ) This uses the program
17009 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17015 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17016 font access (see section
17017 \begin_inset space ~
17021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17023 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17028 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17029 vertically written Japanese.
17032 \begin_layout Description
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17037 (cropped) This is the same as
17040 \begin_inset space ~
17045 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17046 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17047 to generate good-looking
17048 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17051 \begin_layout Description
17053 \begin_inset space ~
17056 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17060 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17064 \begin_layout Description
17066 \begin_inset space ~
17069 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17073 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17074 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17078 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17079 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17082 \begin_layout Standard
17086 \begin_inset space ~
17095 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17096 works without problems.
17097 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17098 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17102 \begin_inset space ~
17110 \begin_inset space ~
17115 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17125 \begin_inset Index idx
17128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17129 FileFormats ! XHTML
17135 \begin_inset Index idx
17138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17147 \begin_layout Standard
17148 This file type has the extension
17149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17161 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17162 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17163 When \SpecialChar LyX
17164 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17165 suitable for the purpose.
17166 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17172 between different formats, which are described in section
17174 Math Output in XHTML
17179 \begin_inset space ~
17187 \begin_layout Standard
17188 XHTML output remains
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17197 features are supported yet.
17201 and the World Wide Web
17205 Additional Features
17207 manual, for more information.
17210 \begin_layout Standard
17211 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17214 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17220 \begin_layout Subsection
17222 \begin_inset Index idx
17225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17234 \begin_layout Standard
17235 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17236 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17245 or use the toolbar button
17252 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17253 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17260 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17264 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17272 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17277 Further output formats can be selected via
17279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17280 View (Other Formats)
17282 or the toolbar button
17291 \begin_layout Standard
17292 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17293 viewer window using the menu
17295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17301 Update (Other Formats)
17306 \begin_layout Standard
17307 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17310 To have a real output, export your document.
17313 \begin_layout Section
17314 A few Words about Typography
17315 \begin_inset Index idx
17318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_layout Subsection
17328 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_inset Index idx
17342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_layout Standard
17352 In \SpecialChar LyX
17354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17365 symbol comes in four variants: the
17382 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17388 \begin_layout Standard
17389 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17399 height_special "totalheight"
17404 backgroundcolor "none"
17407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17408 \begin_inset Tabular
17409 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17410 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17411 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17412 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17413 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17414 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17483 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17506 system key combination
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17511 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17523 and the em dash with
17526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17539 is the Mac label for the right
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17563 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 system key combination or
17587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17660 Dashes can also be inserted with
17662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17667 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17675 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17676 and 2014 for the en dash).
17679 \begin_layout Standard
17680 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17681 mode and has a length of its own.
17682 Here are some examples:
17685 \begin_layout Enumerate
17686 line- and page-breaks
17687 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17697 \begin_layout Enumerate
17699 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17713 \begin_layout Enumerate
17714 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17715 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17725 \begin_layout Enumerate
17726 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17730 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17740 \begin_layout Standard
17742 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17744 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17745 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17753 \begin_layout Subsection
17754 Dashes and Line Breaks
17755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17757 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17766 case and locale, e.
17767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17773 \begin_layout Itemize
17774 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17775 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17778 \begin_layout Itemize
17779 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17783 \begin_layout Itemize
17784 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17785 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17789 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17790 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17801 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17804 \begin_layout Enumerate
17805 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17806 \begin_inset space ~
17809 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17811 The Elements of Typographic Style
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17817 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17820 \begin_layout Enumerate
17821 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17828 Prevent Hyphenation
17833 \begin_inset space ~
17849 in \SpecialChar TeX
17855 \begin_layout Itemize
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17871 height_special "totalheight"
17876 backgroundcolor "none"
17879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17888 \begin_layout Itemize
17892 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17902 height_special "totalheight"
17907 backgroundcolor "none"
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17914 \begin_inset space ~
17922 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17926 – sont très utiles.
17929 \begin_layout Itemize
17936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17951 \begin_inset space ~
17954 – in contrast to an overfull line
17955 \begin_inset space ~
17958 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17962 \begin_layout Standard
17963 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17968 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17969 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17974 \begin_layout Enumerate
17975 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17976 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17977 or \SpecialChar TeX
17983 \begin_layout Itemize
17987 \begin_inset space ~
17990 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17994 – sont très utiles.
17998 \begin_layout Enumerate
17999 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18000 \begin_inset Newline newline
18005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18006 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18007 Optional line break
18013 \begin_layout Itemize
18014 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18015 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18016 should be followed by
18017 a line break opportunity.
18020 \begin_layout Standard
18021 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18022 \begin_inset space ~
18026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18028 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18039 \begin_layout Enumerate
18040 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18041 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18042 or en dashes (see section
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18049 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18060 Changes and backwards compatibility
18063 \begin_layout Standard
18064 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18066 \begin_inset space ~
18069 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18070 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18079 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18080 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18088 \begin_layout Standard
18089 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18094 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18096 prevents ligation to dashes.
18098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18105 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18110 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18111 after the input (unless the current text font is
18119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18120 The behavior was changed since
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18137 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18138 as non-breakable dashes.
18139 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18151 \begin_inset space ~
18159 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18164 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18169 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18170 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18172 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18176 If you used both literal and
18177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18184 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18189 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18190 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18193 \begin_layout Subsection
18195 \begin_inset Index idx
18198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18207 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18214 \begin_layout Standard
18215 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18216 but automatically in the output.
18217 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18223 \begin_inset Index idx
18226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 following the rules of the document language.
18235 does not hyphenate text in the
18239 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18242 \begin_layout Standard
18244 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18248 font and with unusual constructs, like
18249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18258 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18259 This is done with the menu
18261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18264 \begin_inset space ~
18270 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18272 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18276 \begin_layout Standard
18277 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18278 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18289 would then see the hyphen
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 as a line break possibility.
18298 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18299 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18303 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18306 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18308 Prevent Hyphenation
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18321 \begin_layout Subsection
18323 \begin_inset Index idx
18326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18336 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18339 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18347 When \SpecialChar LyX
18348 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18349 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18351 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18357 appropriate amount of space.
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18363 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18364 gets after another word.
18367 \begin_layout Standard
18368 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18369 not work in all cases.
18371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18382 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18383 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18386 \begin_layout Standard
18387 Here are some examples of
18391 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18394 \begin_layout Itemize
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18405 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18408 \begin_layout Itemize
18410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18414 this is too much space!
18417 \begin_layout Itemize
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18430 \begin_layout Enumerate
18434 \begin_inset space ~
18439 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18440 \begin_inset space ~
18444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18446 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18451 \begin_inset Index idx
18454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 Spaces ! inter-word
18463 \begin_layout Enumerate
18467 \begin_inset space ~
18472 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18473 \begin_inset space ~
18477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18479 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18484 \begin_inset Index idx
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Enumerate
18500 \begin_inset space ~
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18508 \begin_inset space ~
18515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18522 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18523 This function is also bound to
18526 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18532 \begin_layout Standard
18533 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18536 \begin_layout Itemize
18538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18542 \begin_inset space \space{}
18545 this is too much space!
18548 \begin_layout Itemize
18549 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18553 \begin_layout Standard
18554 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18555 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18557 will take care of this.
18560 \begin_layout Standard
18561 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18571 feature described in the section
18573 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18578 Additional Features
18583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18585 \begin_inset Index idx
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 Typography ! Quotation marks
18595 \begin_inset Index idx
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18599 Quotation marks | see
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 \begin_layout Standard
18631 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18632 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18633 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18643 The keyboard character,
18647 , generates this automatically.
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18651 You can specify what character the
18655 key produces by using the submenu
18661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18665 \begin_inset Index idx
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18669 Document ! Settings
18674 dialog and switching the
18678 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18679 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18681 \begin_inset space ~
18687 \begin_layout Labeling
18688 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18700 \begin_inset space ~
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18708 \begin_inset Quotes els
18712 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18726 \begin_inset Quotes els
18730 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18733 quotation marks (as common, e.
18734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18740 \begin_layout Labeling
18741 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18744 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18748 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18760 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18764 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18770 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18774 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18778 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18782 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18785 quotation marks (as common, e.
18786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18792 \begin_layout Labeling
18793 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18796 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18800 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18804 \begin_inset space ~
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18812 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18816 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18822 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18826 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18830 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18834 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18837 quotation marks (as common, e.
18838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18844 \begin_layout Labeling
18845 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18848 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18852 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18856 \begin_inset space ~
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18864 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18868 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18874 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18878 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18882 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18886 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18889 quotation marks (as common, e.
18890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18896 \begin_layout Labeling
18897 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18900 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18904 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18920 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18926 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18930 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18934 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18938 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18941 quotation marks (as common, e.
18942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18945 g., in Switzerland)
18948 \begin_layout Labeling
18949 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18952 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18956 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18968 \begin_inset Quotes als
18972 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18978 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18982 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18986 \begin_inset Quotes als
18990 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18993 quotation marks (as common, e.
18994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19000 \begin_layout Labeling
19001 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19004 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19008 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19012 \begin_inset space ~
19016 \begin_inset space ~
19020 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19024 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19030 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19034 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19038 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19042 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19045 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19048 \begin_layout Labeling
19049 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19052 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19072 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19078 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19082 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19086 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19090 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19093 quotation marks (as common, e.
19094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19097 g., in Great Britain)
19100 \begin_layout Labeling
19101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19104 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19108 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19124 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19130 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19134 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19138 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19142 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19145 quotation marks (as common, e.
19146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19152 \begin_layout Labeling
19153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19156 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19160 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19176 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19182 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19186 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19190 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19194 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19197 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19203 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19204 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19205 the inner marks differ).
19213 \begin_layout Labeling
19214 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19217 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19221 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19225 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19237 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19243 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19247 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19251 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19255 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19258 quotation marks (as common, e.
19259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19265 \begin_layout Labeling
19266 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19269 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19273 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19289 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19295 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19299 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19303 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19307 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19310 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19313 \begin_layout Labeling
19314 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19315 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19323 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19339 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19347 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19351 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19355 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19359 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19363 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19366 quotation marks (as common, e.
19367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19376 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19384 \begin_layout Labeling
19385 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19386 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19394 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19400 \begin_inset space ~
19404 \begin_inset space ~
19410 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19418 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19422 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19426 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19430 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19434 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19437 quotation marks (as common, e.
19438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19441 g., in North Korea and China)
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19446 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19447 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19455 \begin_layout Standard
19456 Inner quotation marks
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19462 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19463 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19471 does not necessarily mean
19472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19480 This is why we call them
19481 \begin_inset Quotes els
19485 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19501 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19503 \begin_inset Quotes els
19507 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19510 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19513 arg "quote-insert inner"
19518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19524 \begin_layout Standard
19525 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19526 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19527 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19528 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19529 If you check the setting
19531 Use dynamic quotation marks
19535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19539 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19540 they appear in a special color).
19541 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19542 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19547 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19550 \begin_layout Standard
19551 Individual quotation marks (i.
19552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19555 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19556 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19560 \begin_layout Subsection
19562 \begin_inset Index idx
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 Typography ! Ligatures
19572 \begin_inset Index idx
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19606 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19613 \begin_layout Standard
19614 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19615 print them as single characters.
19616 These groups are known as
19621 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19622 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19624 Here are the standard ligatures:
19627 \begin_layout Itemize
19631 \begin_layout Itemize
19635 \begin_layout Itemize
19639 \begin_layout Itemize
19643 \begin_layout Itemize
19647 \begin_layout Standard
19648 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19651 \begin_layout Standard
19652 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19653 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19661 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19677 To break a ligature, use
19679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19682 \begin_inset space ~
19689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19717 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19725 \begin_layout Subsection
19727 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19729 \begin_inset Index idx
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 \begin_layout Standard
19745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19746 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19750 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19753 \begin_layout Description
19755 The name of the game.
19758 \begin_layout Description
19760 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19764 \begin_layout Description
19766 The \SpecialChar TeX
19767 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19771 \begin_layout Description
19772 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19773 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19777 \begin_layout Standard
19778 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19784 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19792 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19793 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19794 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19795 converges to the number
19796 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19799 : The actual version is
19800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19808 , the previous one was
19809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19820 \begin_layout Subsection
19822 \begin_inset Index idx
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 \begin_layout Standard
19835 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19836 space between two words.
19837 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19847 for units use the menu
19849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19850 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19852 \begin_inset space ~
19860 arg "space-insert thin"
19866 \begin_layout Standard
19867 Here is an example to show the differences:
19870 \begin_layout Standard
19871 \begin_inset Tabular
19872 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19873 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19874 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19875 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 \begin_inset space ~
19886 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 space between number and unit
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19914 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 half space between number and unit
19939 \begin_layout Subsection
19941 \begin_inset Index idx
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19953 \begin_layout Standard
19954 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19956 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19957 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19958 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19959 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19960 These bits of text became known as
19971 \begin_layout Standard
19972 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19973 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19974 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19975 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19976 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19977 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19978 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19979 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19980 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19981 \begin_inset Newline newline
19989 \begin_inset Newline newline
19997 \begin_inset Newline newline
20000 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20001 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20002 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20004 \begin_inset space ~
20008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20010 key "latexcompanion"
20016 \begin_inset space ~
20020 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20027 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20028 's page break mechanism.
20031 \begin_layout Chapter
20032 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20035 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20042 \begin_layout Standard
20043 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20046 \begin_inset space ~
20052 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20055 \begin_layout Section
20057 \begin_inset Index idx
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20076 \begin_layout Standard
20078 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20081 \begin_layout Description
20084 \begin_inset space ~
20087 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20088 \begin_inset Newline newline
20092 \begin_inset Note Note
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20104 \begin_layout Description
20105 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20106 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20107 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20110 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20111 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20113 \begin_inset space ~
20119 \begin_inset Newline newline
20123 \begin_inset Note Comment
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20136 \begin_layout Description
20138 \begin_inset space ~
20141 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20142 set in the document settings under
20144 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20146 \begin_inset space ~
20152 \begin_inset Newline newline
20156 \begin_inset Newline newline
20160 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20170 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20175 of a comment that appears in the output.
20181 \begin_inset Newline newline
20185 \begin_inset Newline newline
20188 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20191 \begin_layout Standard
20192 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20204 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20207 \begin_layout Section
20209 \begin_inset Index idx
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20221 name "sec:Footnotes"
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20230 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20236 or the toolbar button
20239 arg "footnote-insert"
20251 \begin_inset Graphics
20252 filename clipart/footnote.png
20261 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20262 's representation of your footnote.
20272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20291 label, the box will
20295 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20296 Clicking on the box label again will close
20309 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20310 and click on the footnote
20325 \begin_layout Standard
20326 Here is an example footnote:
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20343 \begin_layout Standard
20344 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20345 position where the footnote box is placed.
20346 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20347 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20348 according to the document class.
20350 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20351 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20357 ey are described in the
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20368 \begin_layout Section
20370 \begin_inset Index idx
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20382 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20389 \begin_layout Standard
20390 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20392 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20396 \begin_inset space ~
20401 or the toolbar button
20404 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20430 appearing within your text.
20431 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20432 's representation of your margin
20441 \begin_layout Standard
20442 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20446 \begin_inset Marginal
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20451 This is a marginal note.
20459 \begin_layout Standard
20460 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20461 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20462 pages, right on odd pages.
20465 \begin_layout Standard
20466 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20469 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset space ~
20485 \begin_layout Section
20486 Graphics and Images
20487 \begin_inset Index idx
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 \begin_inset Index idx
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20509 name "sec:Graphics"
20516 \begin_layout Standard
20517 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20518 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20521 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20530 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20533 \begin_layout Standard
20534 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20539 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20540 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20542 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20543 \begin_inset space ~
20547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20549 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20556 \begin_layout Standard
20561 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20562 of the image in the output.
20563 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20567 \begin_inset space ~
20571 \begin_inset space ~
20580 \begin_inset space ~
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20593 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20594 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20602 \begin_layout Standard
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20615 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20616 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20618 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20623 \begin_inset space ~
20628 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20629 with the image size is printed.
20632 \begin_layout Standard
20633 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20634 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20636 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20639 \begin_layout Standard
20641 \begin_inset Graphics
20642 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20650 \begin_layout Standard
20651 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20652 the image into a float, see section
20653 \begin_inset space ~
20657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20659 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20666 \begin_layout Subsection
20668 \begin_inset Index idx
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20680 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 You can insert images in any known file format.
20689 But as we explained in section
20690 \begin_inset space ~
20694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20696 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20700 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20702 therefore uses the program
20706 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20707 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20708 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20709 \begin_inset space ~
20713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20715 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20722 \begin_layout Standard
20723 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20726 \begin_layout Description
20728 \begin_inset space ~
20731 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20732 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20733 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20737 Graphics Interchange Format
20738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20741 (GIF, file extension
20742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20754 \begin_inset Index idx
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20789 Portable Network Graphics
20790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20793 (PNG, file extension
20794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20806 \begin_inset Index idx
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20841 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20845 (JPG, file extension
20846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20870 \begin_inset Index idx
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 \begin_layout Description
20906 \begin_inset space ~
20909 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20911 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20912 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20913 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20914 \begin_inset Newline newline
20917 Scalable image formats can be
20918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20921 Scalable Vector Graphics
20922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20925 (SVG, file extension
20926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20938 \begin_inset Index idx
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20973 Encapsulated PostScript
20974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20977 (EPS, file extension
20978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20990 \begin_inset Index idx
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21025 Portable Document Format
21026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21029 (PDF, file extension
21030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21042 \begin_inset Index idx
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21060 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21061 result will not be scalable.
21062 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21076 \begin_layout Standard
21077 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21084 \begin_layout Subsection
21085 Grouping of Image Settings
21086 \begin_inset Index idx
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 Images ! Settings grouping
21098 \begin_layout Standard
21099 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21101 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21102 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21104 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21105 need to manually change each of them.
21109 \begin_layout Standard
21110 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21113 \begin_inset space ~
21117 \begin_inset space ~
21129 \begin_inset space ~
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21139 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21140 and checking the name of the desired group.
21143 \begin_layout Section
21145 \begin_inset Index idx
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21164 \begin_layout Standard
21165 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21168 arg "tabular-insert"
21173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21177 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21178 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21179 from the rest of the table.
21180 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21181 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21183 Here is an example table:
21186 \begin_layout Standard
21188 \begin_inset Tabular
21189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21194 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 \begin_layout Subsection
21398 \begin_layout Standard
21399 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21402 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21406 This brings up the table dialog.
21407 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21408 cursor is placed currently.
21409 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21410 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21411 done on all of your selection.
21414 \begin_layout Standard
21415 In addition to the table dialog, the
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21423 helps you in setting table properties.
21424 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21427 \begin_layout Standard
21431 \begin_inset space ~
21436 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21437 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21438 current cell respectively.
21439 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21441 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21442 of text, see section
21443 \begin_inset space ~
21447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21449 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21456 \begin_layout Standard
21457 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21458 using the check box
21467 This will merge the cells to
21471 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21472 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21473 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21474 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21475 in the last row without the upper border:
21478 \begin_layout Standard
21480 \begin_inset Tabular
21481 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21482 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21483 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21484 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21485 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21486 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21497 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_layout Standard
21618 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21619 -arguments for the table.
21620 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21621 explained in the chapter
21628 \begin_inset space ~
21634 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21635 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21636 but are visible in the output.
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 Most DVI-viewers are
21652 able to display rotations.
21660 \begin_layout Standard
21665 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21670 adds lines for all cell borders.
21673 \begin_layout Subsection
21675 \begin_inset Index idx
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 Tables ! Multi-page
21685 \begin_inset Index idx
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 \begin_layout Standard
21698 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21701 \begin_inset space ~
21705 \begin_inset space ~
21713 \begin_inset space ~
21718 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21719 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21722 \begin_layout Description
21727 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21728 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21729 Except for the first page, if
21732 \begin_inset space ~
21740 \begin_layout Description
21744 \begin_inset space ~
21749 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21750 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21753 \begin_layout Description
21758 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21759 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21760 except for the last page, if
21763 \begin_inset space ~
21771 \begin_layout Description
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21780 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21781 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21784 \begin_layout Description
21785 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21786 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21788 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21792 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21795 \begin_inset space ~
21803 \begin_layout Standard
21804 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21805 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21806 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21812 In this context, first means first in this order:
21815 \begin_inset space ~
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21832 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21835 \begin_layout Standard
21837 \begin_inset Tabular
21838 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21839 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21840 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21841 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21842 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21843 <row endfirsthead="true">
21844 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21855 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <row endfirsthead="true">
21875 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <row endhead="true">
21908 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <row endhead="true">
21939 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <row endfoot="true">
21972 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 <row endlastfoot="true">
23954 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_layout Subsection
23993 \begin_inset Index idx
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24005 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24012 \begin_layout Standard
24013 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24014 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24015 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24016 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24020 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24023 \begin_layout Standard
24024 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24025 for the column in the table dialog.
24026 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24027 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24031 \begin_layout Standard
24033 \begin_inset Tabular
24034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24037 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 This is longer now.
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24240 This is longer now.
24245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 \begin_layout Standard
24272 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24273 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24279 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24285 Selection with the mouse or with
24289 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24290 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24291 the selection from outside the table.
24294 \begin_layout Section
24296 \begin_inset Index idx
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24315 \begin_layout Subsection
24319 \begin_layout Standard
24320 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24321 have a fixed location.
24323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24330 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24338 \begin_inset space ~
24343 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24344 too many notes on the current page.
24347 \begin_layout Standard
24348 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24349 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24350 and pages without text.
24351 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24352 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24353 Floats are therefore numbered.
24354 Referencing is described in section
24355 \begin_inset space ~
24359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24361 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24369 To insert a float, use the menu
24371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24375 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24376 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24378 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24379 \begin_inset Index idx
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24389 paragraph within the float.
24390 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24391 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24392 left-clicking on the box label.
24393 A closed float box looks like this:
24394 \begin_inset Graphics
24395 filename clipart/float.png
24400 – a gray button with a red label.
24403 \begin_layout Standard
24404 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24406 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24409 \begin_layout Subsection
24411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24413 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24418 \begin_inset Index idx
24421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 Floats ! Figure floats
24430 \begin_layout Standard
24432 \begin_inset space ~
24436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24438 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24442 was created using the menu
24444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24445 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24451 arg "float-insert figure"
24455 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24464 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24468 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24469 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24473 \begin_inset space ~
24481 arg "layout-paragraph"
24487 \begin_layout Standard
24488 \begin_inset Float figure
24493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24495 \begin_inset Graphics
24496 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24511 name "fig:A-star-in"
24528 \begin_layout Standard
24529 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24530 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24541 ) and refer to it using the menu
24543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24549 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24553 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24554 vague references like
24555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24562 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24563 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24573 For more about cross-references, see section
24574 \begin_inset space ~
24578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24580 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24587 \begin_layout Standard
24588 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24589 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24590 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24591 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24592 as described in section
24593 \begin_inset space ~
24597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24599 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24605 \begin_inset space ~
24609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24611 reference "fig:Two-images"
24615 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24616 You can also set the images one below the other.
24618 \begin_inset space ~
24622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24624 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24631 reference "fig:Star"
24635 are the subfigures.
24638 \begin_layout Standard
24639 \begin_inset Float figure
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24649 \begin_inset Float figure
24654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24660 name "fig:Undefinable"
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 \begin_inset Graphics
24674 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24686 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24690 \begin_inset Float figure
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 \begin_inset Graphics
24715 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24727 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24739 name "fig:Two-images"
24756 \begin_layout Subsection
24758 \begin_inset Index idx
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 Floats ! Table floats
24770 \begin_layout Standard
24771 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24774 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24777 or the toolbar button
24780 arg "float-insert table"
24784 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24785 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24786 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24788 \begin_inset space ~
24792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24794 reference "tab:Table-float"
24801 \begin_layout Standard
24802 \begin_inset Float table
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24813 name "tab:Table-float"
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 \begin_inset Tabular
24828 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24829 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24830 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24831 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24832 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24983 \end{array}\right]$
24991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25025 \begin_layout Subsection
25027 \begin_inset Index idx
25030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_layout Standard
25041 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25042 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25043 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25045 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25061 \begin_layout Section
25063 \begin_inset Index idx
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25075 \begin_layout Standard
25077 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25079 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25080 \begin_inset space \space{}
25087 \begin_layout Standard
25088 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25089 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25095 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25096 and its alignment within the page.
25099 \begin_layout Standard
25101 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25111 height_special "totalheight"
25116 backgroundcolor "none"
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 This is a minipage.
25123 The text is set in an italic style.
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25129 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25130 another formatting.
25138 \begin_layout Standard
25139 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25142 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25146 as described in section
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25158 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25164 \begin_layout Standard
25165 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25175 height_special "totalheight"
25180 backgroundcolor "none"
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25185 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25191 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25195 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25205 height_special "totalheight"
25210 backgroundcolor "none"
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25215 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25223 \begin_layout Standard
25224 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25230 \begin_layout Standard
25231 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25233 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25240 \begin_inset space ~
25248 \begin_layout Chapter
25249 Mathematical Formulas
25250 \begin_inset Index idx
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 \begin_inset Index idx
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25294 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25301 \begin_layout Standard
25302 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25307 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25310 \begin_layout Section
25312 \begin_inset Index idx
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_layout Standard
25325 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25338 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25340 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25341 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25342 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25350 \begin_layout Standard
25351 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25355 \begin_inset space ~
25360 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25363 \begin_layout Standard
25364 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25365 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25368 \begin_layout Standard
25369 This is a line with an inline formula
25370 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25376 \begin_layout Standard
25377 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25378 paragraph, like this one:
25379 \begin_inset Formula
25386 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25389 \begin_layout Standard
25391 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25393 For example, typing
25394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25407 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25408 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25412 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25415 \begin_inset space ~
25423 \begin_layout Subsection
25424 Navigating in Formulas
25425 \begin_inset Index idx
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25439 achieved with the arrow keys.
25441 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25442 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25447 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25448 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25452 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25456 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25459 \end{array}\right]$
25467 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25472 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25473 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25476 \begin_layout Standard
25481 , printed in this document as
25482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25493 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25494 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25495 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25500 For example, if you want
25501 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25509 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25519 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25528 , since in the latter case only the
25531 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25536 will be under the square root sign:
25537 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25546 \begin_inset Formula
25548 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25557 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25558 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25561 \begin_layout Subsection
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25567 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25571 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25572 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25573 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25574 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25575 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25579 \begin_layout Subsection
25580 Exponents and Subscripts
25581 \begin_inset Index idx
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25607 arg "math-superscript"
25613 arg "math-subscript"
25616 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25618 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25621 , type in a formula
25624 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25634 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25640 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25644 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25650 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25656 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25665 , you have to use an extra
25669 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25670 For example, if you want
25671 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25677 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25683 Subscripts are similar: To get
25684 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25690 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25698 \begin_layout Subsection
25700 \begin_inset Index idx
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 \begin_layout Standard
25713 Create a fraction either with the command
25719 or by using the icon
25722 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25728 \begin_inset space ~
25734 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25735 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25736 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25741 To move back up, press
25746 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25747 \begin_inset Formula
25749 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25752 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25760 \begin_layout Subsection
25762 \begin_inset Index idx
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 \begin_layout Standard
25775 Roots can be created using the
25778 \begin_inset space ~
25786 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25792 arg "math-insert \\root"
25814 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25820 always produces a square root.
25823 \begin_layout Subsection
25824 Operators with Limits
25825 \begin_inset Index idx
25828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25835 \begin_inset Index idx
25838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25847 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25854 \begin_layout Standard
25856 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25860 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25863 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25864 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25865 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25866 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25867 The sum operator will automatically place its
25868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25877 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25881 \begin_inset Formula
25883 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25888 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25892 \begin_layout Standard
25893 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25895 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25896 behind the operator and using the menu
25898 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25899 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25901 \begin_inset space ~
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25929 \begin_inset Index idx
25932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25939 \begin_inset Formula
25941 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25946 which will place the
25947 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25959 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25960 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25974 Have a look at section
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25981 reference "subsec:Functions"
25985 for an explanation of function macros.
25988 \begin_layout Subsection
25990 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 \begin_layout Standard
26003 Most math symbols can be found in the
26006 \begin_inset space ~
26011 under one of several categories; including
26028 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26034 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26035 don't have to use the
26038 \begin_inset space ~
26043 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26045 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26048 \begin_layout Subsection
26050 \begin_inset Index idx
26053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 \begin_layout Standard
26063 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26069 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26083 arg "math-insert \\space"
26087 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26088 For example, the sequence
26093 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26096 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26098 \begin_inset Graphics
26099 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26104 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26105 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26106 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26107 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26108 , because they are negative
26110 Here are two examples:
26113 \begin_layout Standard
26123 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26129 \begin_layout Standard
26139 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26145 \begin_layout Subsection
26147 \begin_inset Index idx
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26159 name "subsec:Functions"
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26170 \begin_inset space ~
26175 contains under the button
26178 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26181 a number of function macros, such as
26182 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26186 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26194 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26201 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26202 avoid confusions, because
26203 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26207 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26213 \begin_layout Standard
26214 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26216 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26220 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26228 are placed, as described in section
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26235 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26242 \begin_layout Subsection
26244 \begin_inset Index idx
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 \begin_layout Standard
26257 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26259 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26260 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26261 commands, for example, to enter
26262 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26265 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26266 Our example is entered by typing
26271 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26278 \begin_inset space ~
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26284 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26288 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26291 \begin_layout Standard
26292 \begin_inset Float table
26297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26298 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26303 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26307 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26317 \begin_inset Tabular
26318 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26319 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26320 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26321 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26322 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26460 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26622 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26784 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26883 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26905 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26908 \begin_inset space ~
26916 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26919 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26923 \begin_layout Section
26924 Brackets and Delimiters
26925 \begin_inset Index idx
26928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26935 \begin_inset Index idx
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26947 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26957 For some purposes, using just the keys
26962 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26963 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26964 toolbar delimiter icon
26967 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26971 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26972 \begin_inset Formula
26974 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26982 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26983 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26987 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26990 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26996 \begin_inset Formula
26998 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27006 \begin_layout Standard
27007 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27008 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27014 left side and right side.
27015 If you use the option
27018 \begin_inset space ~
27023 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27024 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27026 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27031 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27032 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27035 \begin_layout Standard
27036 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27037 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27038 is to go inside the brackets.
27039 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27044 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27045 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27046 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27050 arg "math-delim ( )"
27056 \begin_layout Section
27057 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27058 \begin_inset Index idx
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 \begin_inset Index idx
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 \begin_inset Index idx
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27095 \begin_inset space ~
27103 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27107 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27108 Here is an example:
27109 \begin_inset Formula
27111 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27120 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27121 \begin_inset space ~
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27127 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27132 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27133 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27134 This alignment is set in the box
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27188 for every column as default.
27189 For example, the sequence
27190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27201 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27202 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27203 corresponds to the relevant column.
27204 The result will look like this:
27205 \begin_inset Formula
27208 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27209 column & has & has\,right\\
27210 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27219 \begin_layout Standard
27220 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27223 arg "newline-insert newline"
27226 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27227 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27229 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27232 or the math toolbar.
27235 \begin_layout Standard
27236 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27237 It can be created with the menu
27239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27240 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27242 \begin_inset space ~
27254 Here is an example:
27255 \begin_inset Formula
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27270 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27273 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27276 arg "newline-insert newline"
27280 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27285 arg "newline-insert newline"
27288 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27296 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27297 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27298 A new row is created by every further entry of
27301 arg "newline-insert newline"
27305 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27306 Here is an example:
27307 \begin_inset Formula
27309 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27310 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27315 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27316 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27317 \begin_inset Formula
27319 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27327 \begin_layout Standard
27328 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27335 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27336 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27339 reference "eq:asquared"
27344 The other types are described in section
27345 \begin_inset space ~
27349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27351 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27358 \begin_layout Section
27359 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27360 \begin_inset Index idx
27363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27364 Math ! Formula numbering
27370 \begin_inset Index idx
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 Math ! Referencing formulas
27380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27382 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27389 \begin_layout Standard
27390 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27393 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27395 \begin_inset space ~
27399 \begin_inset space ~
27407 arg "math-number-toggle"
27411 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27412 within parentheses.
27413 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27414 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27415 the document class.
27416 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27417 separated by a dot:
27418 \begin_inset Formula
27428 arg "math-number-toggle"
27431 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27432 You can only number displayed formulas.
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27439 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27441 \begin_inset space ~
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27453 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27456 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27457 \begin_inset Formula
27460 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27466 To number all lines use the shortcut
27469 arg "math-number-toggle"
27475 \begin_layout Standard
27476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27479 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27480 A label is inserted with the menu
27482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27492 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27493 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27505 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27506 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27507 We inserted in the following example the label
27508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27515 in the second line:
27516 \begin_inset Formula
27518 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27519 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27524 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27525 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27526 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27530 \begin_inset space ~
27538 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27542 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27543 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27544 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27545 as the formula number:
27548 \begin_layout Standard
27549 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27552 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27559 \begin_layout Standard
27560 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27561 's cross-reference box are described in section
27562 \begin_inset space ~
27566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27568 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27573 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27581 \begin_layout Section
27582 User defined math macros
27583 \begin_inset Index idx
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27597 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27598 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27599 Math macros are explained in section
27602 \begin_inset space ~
27614 \begin_layout Section
27618 \begin_layout Subsection
27620 \begin_inset Index idx
27623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 \begin_layout Standard
27633 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27634 To set a font in a formula, use the
27637 \begin_inset space ~
27645 arg "math-insert \\font"
27648 , or enter its command, listed in table
27649 \begin_inset space ~
27653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27655 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27662 \begin_layout Standard
27663 \begin_inset Float table
27668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27674 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27678 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 \begin_inset Tabular
27689 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27690 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27692 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27724 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 \begin_layout Standard
27961 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27986 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27987 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27992 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27993 space when you need a space in the box.
27994 Here is an example where
27995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28006 denotes the set of numbers:
28007 \begin_inset Formula
28009 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28017 \begin_layout Standard
28018 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28019 You can, for example, put a character in
28028 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28032 \begin_inset Newline newline
28035 So it is better not to use this feature.
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28040 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28044 \begin_inset Newline newline
28047 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28053 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28054 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28067 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28070 \begin_layout Standard
28071 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28074 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28076 \begin_inset space ~
28084 \begin_layout Subsection
28086 \begin_inset Index idx
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 \begin_layout Standard
28099 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28101 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28105 \begin_inset space ~
28109 \begin_inset space ~
28117 \begin_inset space ~
28125 arg "math-insert \\font"
28129 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28130 in black instead of blue.
28131 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28132 Here is an example:
28133 \begin_inset Formula
28136 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28137 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28146 \begin_layout Subsection
28148 \begin_inset Index idx
28151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28161 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28162 automatically chosen in most situations.
28180 For most characters,
28188 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28189 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28194 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28195 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28196 thinks are appropriate.
28197 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28200 arg "math-insert \\style"
28204 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28205 For example, you can set
28206 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28209 , which is normally in
28218 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28222 The four styles are used in the following example:
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28230 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28234 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28238 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28245 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28246 is set in a particular size with the menu
28248 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28250 \begin_inset space ~
28255 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28256 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28257 will be adjusted to correspond.
28258 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28279 \begin_layout Section
28280 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28282 \begin_inset Index idx
28285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 \begin_inset Index idx
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28306 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28307 that are in common use.
28310 \begin_layout Subsection
28311 Enabling AMS-Support
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28316 the document by selecting the checkbox
28319 \begin_inset space ~
28323 \begin_inset space ~
28327 \begin_inset space ~
28334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28338 \begin_inset Index idx
28341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28342 Document ! Settings
28350 \begin_inset space ~
28356 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28357 -errors in formulas,
28358 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28361 \begin_layout Subsection
28363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28365 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28370 \begin_inset Index idx
28373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28374 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28383 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28384 provides a selection of different formula types.
28386 allows you to choose between
28407 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28415 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28418 \begin_layout Chapter
28422 \begin_layout Section
28424 \begin_inset Index idx
28427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28436 name "sec:Cross-References"
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28445 's strengths is cross-references.
28446 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28448 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28449 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28450 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28453 \begin_layout Enumerate
28457 \begin_layout Enumerate
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28460 name "enu:Second-item"
28467 \begin_layout Enumerate
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28472 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28477 or by pressing the toolbar button
28484 A gray label box like this:
28485 \begin_inset Graphics
28486 filename clipart/label.png
28490 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28492 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28527 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28528 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28545 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28550 or the toolbar button
28553 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28557 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28558 \begin_inset Graphics
28559 filename clipart/reference.png
28563 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28565 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28578 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28583 As an alternative to
28585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28588 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28593 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28594 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28609 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28610 \begin_inset space ~
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28616 reference "enu:Second-item"
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 It is recommended to use a protected space
28628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 described in section
28630 \begin_inset space ~
28634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28636 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28645 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28646 line breaks between them.
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28653 \begin_layout Description
28654 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28657 reference "fig:Two-images"
28664 \begin_layout Description
28665 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28666 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28678 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28685 \begin_layout Description
28686 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28687 \begin_inset space ~
28691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28692 LatexCommand pageref
28693 reference "fig:Two-images"
28700 \begin_layout Description
28702 \begin_inset space ~
28706 \begin_inset space ~
28709 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28711 LatexCommand vpageref
28712 reference "fig:Two-images"
28717 \begin_inset Newline newline
28720 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28721 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28722 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28723 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28724 it prints “on the next page”.
28725 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28728 \begin_layout Description
28730 \begin_inset space ~
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28741 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28744 reference "fig:Two-images"
28749 \begin_inset Newline newline
28752 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28758 ; otherwise it behaves like
28762 \begin_inset space ~
28766 \begin_inset space ~
28775 \begin_layout Description
28777 \begin_inset space ~
28780 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28781 \begin_inset Newline newline
28785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28803 \begin_inset Index idx
28806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28808 packages ! prettyref
28814 \begin_inset Index idx
28817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 packages ! refstyle
28830 \begin_inset Newline newline
28833 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28834 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28837 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28850 is the default and preferred because
28854 supports only English documents.
28855 The format is specified by using the command
28867 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28868 preamble of the document.
28869 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28887 \begin_inset Newline newline
28894 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28899 \begin_inset Newline newline
28910 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28911 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28913 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28914 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28919 , you might do so as follows:
28920 \begin_inset Newline newline
28927 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28932 \begin_inset Newline newline
28935 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28936 the package documentation
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28939 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28945 \begin_inset Newline newline
28956 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28963 \begin_layout Description
28965 \begin_inset space ~
28968 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28970 LatexCommand nameref
28971 reference "fig:Two-images"
28978 \begin_layout Description
28980 \begin_inset space ~
28983 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28984 label for the reference:
28985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28986 LatexCommand labelonly
28987 reference "fig:Two-images"
28992 \begin_inset Newline newline
28995 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28996 Code, if you want to issue a command
28997 that \SpecialChar LyX
29003 , then you may want to use the
29006 \begin_inset space ~
29011 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29021 This is the form needed for e.
29022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29026 \begin_inset space \space{}
29033 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29034 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29036 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29040 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29044 \begin_layout Standard
29045 You can only use the style
29049 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29053 is always possible.
29056 \begin_layout Standard
29057 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29058 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29060 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29061 \begin_inset space ~
29065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29067 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29075 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29079 \begin_inset space ~
29083 \begin_inset space ~
29088 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29089 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29092 \begin_inset space ~
29097 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29098 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29101 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 You can change labels at any time.
29109 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29110 do not need to think about this.
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29116 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29121 References are described in detail in the section
29122 \begin_inset space ~
29132 \begin_inset space ~
29140 \begin_layout Section
29141 Table of Contents and other Listings
29142 \begin_inset Index idx
29145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 \begin_inset Index idx
29155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29156 Navigating ! Outline
29162 \begin_inset Index idx
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29181 \begin_layout Subsection
29183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29185 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29193 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29208 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29210 If you click on it, the
29214 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29215 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29216 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29218 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29220 \begin_inset space ~
29225 that is described in section
29226 \begin_inset space ~
29230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29232 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29239 \begin_layout Standard
29240 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29241 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29243 \begin_inset space ~
29247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29249 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29253 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29255 \begin_inset space ~
29259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29261 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29265 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29267 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29270 \begin_layout Subsection
29271 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29274 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29281 \begin_layout Standard
29282 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29284 You can insert them via the
29286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29290 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29293 \begin_layout Section
29294 URLs and Hyperlinks
29295 \begin_inset Index idx
29298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29305 \begin_inset Index idx
29308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29317 \begin_layout Subsection
29319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29329 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29338 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29340 \begin_inset Flex URL
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29345 https://www.lyx.org
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29360 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29373 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29382 \begin_layout Subsection
29384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29386 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29399 or with the toolbar button
29406 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29415 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29416 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29419 name "LyX's homepage"
29420 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29425 , an Email address like this:
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29428 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29429 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29435 , or a link to a file.
29440 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29462 to the link target.
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29467 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29468 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29469 the text style dialog.
29470 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29476 name "LyX's homepage"
29477 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29486 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29490 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29493 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29497 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29499 \begin_inset Newline newline
29507 \begin_inset Newline newline
29514 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29517 \begin_layout Section
29519 \begin_inset Index idx
29522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29531 name "sec:Appendices"
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29539 Appendices are created with the menu
29541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 \begin_inset space ~
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29553 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29554 as the appendix part of the book.
29555 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29559 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29560 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29561 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29562 and the subsection number.
29563 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29569 \begin_inset space ~
29573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29575 reference "chap:Credits"
29580 \begin_inset space ~
29584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29586 reference "subsec:Export"
29593 \begin_layout Section
29595 \begin_inset Index idx
29598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29607 name "sec:Bibliography"
29614 \begin_layout Standard
29615 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29617 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29624 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29631 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29636 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29643 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29648 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29649 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29650 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29654 using a bibliography database.
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29658 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29659 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29663 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29664 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29665 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29666 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29667 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29670 \begin_layout Subsection
29671 The Bibliography Environment
29672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29674 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29686 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29688 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29697 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29699 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29700 of ASCII characters only.
29704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29709 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29715 \begin_inset Newline newline
29719 \begin_inset Flex URL
29722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29724 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29734 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29744 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29745 \begin_inset Newline newline
29752 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29753 the number of the entry.
29758 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29768 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29773 or the toolbar button
29776 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29780 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29781 containing the available citations.
29782 Select one or more keys from the list and
29792 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29793 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29799 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29800 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29816 Companion Second Edition
29819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29821 key "latexcompanion"
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29830 The \SpecialChar LyX
29831 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29842 \begin_layout Standard
29843 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29850 \begin_inset Index idx
29853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29861 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 Author A and Author B(Year)
29874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29881 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29883 Then, if you select
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29891 in the document settings
29892 \begin_inset Index idx
29895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29896 Document ! Settings
29903 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29905 \begin_inset space ~
29911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29913 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29920 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29927 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29937 arg "layout-paragraph"
29941 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29944 \begin_layout Subsection
29945 Bibliography databases
29946 \begin_inset Index idx
29949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29950 Bibliography ! Databases
29956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29958 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29965 \begin_layout Standard
29966 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29972 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29974 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29975 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29980 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29982 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29983 your working field in a database.
29984 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29985 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29986 list for that document.
29987 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 The database is a text file with the file extension
29993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30004 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30005 The format is explained in
30006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30013 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30017 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30023 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30024 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30025 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30027 \begin_inset Flex URL
30030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30032 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30042 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30043 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30044 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30046 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30048 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30049 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30050 Those are addressed by
30055 \begin_inset Index idx
30058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30060 packages ! biblatex
30066 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30067 (although it has been significantly
30068 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30078 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30079 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30080 might conversely fail to correctly
30081 handle databases that use specific
30090 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30100 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 Document ! Settings
30122 \begin_inset space ~
30127 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30136 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30138 \begin_inset Index idx
30141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30160 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30162 \begin_inset space ~
30168 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30169 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30177 Add bibliography to TOC
30179 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30184 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30185 in the document or just the cited references.
30187 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30192 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30193 differ from the encoding of the document.
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30199 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30200 style file is a text file with the file extension
30201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30212 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30213 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30214 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30215 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30217 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30223 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30224 \begin_inset Newline newline
30228 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30230 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30240 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30245 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30249 \begin_layout Standard
30250 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30255 \begin_inset Index idx
30258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30259 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30265 \begin_inset Index idx
30268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 packages ! biblatex
30278 \begin_layout Standard
30279 Accessing a database via
30283 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30291 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30293 \begin_inset space ~
30299 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30300 you cannot select a
30305 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30314 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30327 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30328 file (text file with the file extension
30329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30340 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30341 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30343 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30347 \begin_layout Standard
30352 styles are not set in the
30355 \begin_inset space ~
30360 dialog, but in the document settings.
30361 \begin_inset Index idx
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 Document ! Settings
30370 However, in the dialog in the
30374 field, which is only visible if you use
30378 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30379 example how its heading will appear).
30380 These options are described in detail in the
30385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30396 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30397 \begin_inset space ~
30401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30403 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30414 Bibliography Processors
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30418 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30419 uses a bibliography processor,
30420 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30421 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30422 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30424 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30425 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30431 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30432 You can do this on a general level in
30434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30436 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30439 or for individual documents in
30441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30446 The following variants are available by default:
30449 \begin_layout Description
30450 biber a specific, modern processor
30451 \begin_inset Index idx
30454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 developed exclusively for
30465 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30471 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30476 makes use of; if you use the
30480 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30487 \begin_layout Description
30488 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30489 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30490 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30494 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30497 \begin_layout Description
30498 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30499 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30503 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30507 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30511 features are supported.
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 By default (with the
30521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30522 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30535 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30536 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30537 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30540 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30541 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30554 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30555 -based bibliography styles).
30556 This should suit most needs.
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30561 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30562 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30567 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30568 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30569 You can adjust it in
30571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30572 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30573 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30579 \begin_layout Standard
30580 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30581 can add below the selection.
30582 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30583 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30603 \begin_layout Standard
30605 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30607 These are explained in detail in section
30609 Customizing Bibliographies
30613 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30618 Additional Features
30623 \begin_layout Subsection
30625 \begin_inset Index idx
30628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30629 Bibliography ! Citation format
30635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30637 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30645 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30650 \begin_inset space \space{}
30653 numerical citation (as
30654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30661 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30669 ) or author-year citations (as
30670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30679 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30684 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30688 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30692 \begin_inset Index idx
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 Document ! Settings
30701 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30707 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30708 labels, is there to use
30711 \begin_inset space ~
30722 \begin_inset space ~
30727 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30730 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 With a bibliography database (see
30739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30741 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30748 ) one has in contrary to the
30752 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30753 These style formats are available:
30756 \begin_layout Description
30758 \begin_inset space ~
30761 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30762 -based approached without any additional packages
30763 (simple numeric citations).
30766 \begin_layout Description
30767 Biblatex loads the package
30772 \begin_inset Index idx
30775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30777 packages ! biblatex
30782 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30784 Biblatex citation style
30788 Biblatex bibliography style
30791 Options to the package
30795 can be entered in the
30802 \begin_layout Description
30804 \begin_inset space ~
30808 \begin_inset space ~
30811 mode) loads the package
30815 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30816 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30828 behavior very closely.
30833 this option has some additional styles.
30838 styles are also supported by this variant.
30841 \begin_layout Description
30843 \begin_inset space ~
30846 (BibTeX) loads the package
30851 \begin_inset Index idx
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30861 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30864 \begin_layout Description
30866 \begin_inset space ~
30869 (BibTeX) loads the package
30874 \begin_inset Index idx
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30887 \begin_layout Standard
30896 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30898 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30907 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30909 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30910 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30912 Biblatex citation style
30915 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30921 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30927 are available in the
30932 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30933 a name prefix such as
30934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30949 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30954 \begin_inset space \space{}
30958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30970 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30976 \begin_inset space \space{}
30979 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30985 \begin_inset space \space{}
30989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31001 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31005 \begin_inset space ~
31013 \begin_inset space ~
31019 Here is a simple example where the text
31020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31024 \begin_inset space ~
31028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31031 appears after the reference:
31034 \begin_layout Quote
31036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31039 key "latexcompanion"
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31048 All styles except for
31052 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31062 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31066 \begin_layout Standard
31067 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31068 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31069 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31074 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31075 multi-citation (so-called
31076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31079 qualified citation lists
31080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31086 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31091 dialog will display three columns in the field
31098 \begin_inset space ~
31106 \begin_inset space ~
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31120 If you double-click on an item's
31123 \begin_inset space ~
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31136 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31139 General text before
31145 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31148 \begin_layout Section
31150 \begin_inset Index idx
31153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31169 \begin_layout Standard
31170 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31174 \begin_inset space ~
31179 or the toolbar button
31186 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31187 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31188 by \SpecialChar LyX
31189 as the index entry.
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31193 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31196 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31198 \begin_inset space ~
31204 A light blue box labeled
31205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31216 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31217 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31221 \begin_layout Standard
31222 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31223 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31224 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31225 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31227 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31229 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31237 \begin_layout Subsection
31238 Grouping Index Entries
31239 \begin_inset Index idx
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31251 \begin_layout Standard
31252 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31254 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31255 lists under the entry
31256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31264 First we create the entry
31265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31273 \begin_inset space ~
31277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31279 reference "subsec:Lists"
31284 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31291 reference "sec:Itemize"
31295 , we insert the command
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31308 \begin_layout Standard
31314 \begin_layout Standard
31315 for the enumerated list in section
31316 \begin_inset space ~
31320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31322 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31329 \begin_layout Standard
31330 The exclamation mark
31331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31338 marks the grouping levels.
31339 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31340 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31341 If we don't have an index entry for
31342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31349 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31352 \begin_layout Subsection
31354 \begin_inset Index idx
31357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31358 Index ! Page ranges
31366 \begin_layout Standard
31367 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31369 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31370 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31371 an index entry in section
31372 \begin_inset space ~
31376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31378 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31388 Paragraph environments|(
31391 \begin_layout Standard
31392 and another entry at the end of section
31393 \begin_inset space ~
31397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31399 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31409 Paragraph environments|)
31412 \begin_layout Standard
31414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31437 respectively start and end the index range.
31438 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31439 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31440 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31441 An example is the index entry
31442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31445 Document ! Settings
31446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31452 \begin_layout Subsection
31454 \begin_inset Index idx
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31458 Index ! Cross referencing
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31468 We referred for example in the index entry
31469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31477 \begin_inset space ~
31481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31483 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31487 ) to the index entry
31488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31495 in the same section using the entry
31498 \begin_layout Standard
31501 GIF|see{Image formats}
31504 \begin_layout Standard
31505 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31507 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31508 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31511 \begin_layout Subsection
31513 \begin_inset Index idx
31516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31517 Index ! Entry order
31525 \begin_layout Standard
31526 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31527 follow the rules for the index order.
31528 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31534 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31536 \begin_inset space ~
31540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31542 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31551 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31552 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 \begin_inset Index idx
31580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31581 Dummy entries ! maïs
31587 \begin_inset Index idx
31590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31591 Dummy entries ! maître
31597 \begin_inset Index idx
31600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31601 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31606 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31607 maïs, maison, maître.
31608 To achieve this, we use the command
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31614 previous entry@current entry
31617 \begin_layout Standard
31618 In our case we want to have
31619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31634 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31637 \begin_layout Standard
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31644 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31645 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31647 See the next subsection for an example.
31650 \begin_layout Subsection
31652 \begin_inset Index idx
31655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31656 Index ! Entry layout
31664 \begin_layout Standard
31665 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31666 \begin_inset Index idx
31669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31672 This is an italic dummy entry
31677 You can also format the page number using the character
31678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31685 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31686 -command without a backslash.
31687 We can write for example
31690 \begin_layout Standard
31693 italic page number:|textit
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31697 to get the page number in italic.
31698 \begin_inset Index idx
31701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31702 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31707 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31708 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31726 \begin_inset space ~
31732 Have a look at section
31733 \begin_inset space ~
31737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31739 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31743 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31747 \begin_layout Standard
31748 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31760 to generate the index, see section
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31767 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31776 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31781 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31785 key "latexcompanion"
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31801 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31802 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31803 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31804 If so, put the following in the preamble
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_layout Standard
31823 \begin_layout Standard
31829 \begin_layout Standard
31830 in the index entry.
31831 \begin_inset Index idx
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31840 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31841 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31842 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31845 \begin_layout Standard
31846 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31847 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31848 a bold font for all index entries.
31849 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31861 documentation for details,
31862 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31864 key "makeindex,xindy"
31872 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_inset Index idx
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31886 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31893 \begin_layout Standard
31894 If the index generation program
31898 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31899 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31903 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31904 distribution, is used.
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31913 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31914 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31915 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31916 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31917 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31927 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31929 dialog, see section
31930 \begin_inset space ~
31934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31936 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31941 The available options are listed and explained in
31942 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31944 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31950 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31954 \begin_layout Standard
31955 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31956 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31964 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31965 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31968 \begin_layout Subsection
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31974 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31982 next to the standard index.
31984 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31985 that add this feature.
31992 \begin_inset Index idx
31995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31997 packages ! splitidx
32002 package to generate multiple indexes.
32003 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32009 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32011 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32019 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32020 style, but it also includes
32021 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32022 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32032 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32035 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32038 and select the option
32040 Use multiple Indexes
32047 already contains the standard index
32048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32056 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32057 also appear as a heading) to the
32061 input field and press the
32066 The new index now also appears in the list.
32067 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32068 label color to the new index.
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32072 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32082 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32083 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32084 are additional features:
32087 \begin_layout Itemize
32088 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32089 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32092 \begin_layout Itemize
32093 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32094 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32099 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32100 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32101 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32102 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32110 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32111 code in the name of the index.
32114 \begin_layout Section
32115 Nomenclature/Glossary
32116 \begin_inset Index idx
32119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32126 \begin_inset Index idx
32129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32160 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32169 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32170 called nomenclature or glossary.
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32174 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32181 \begin_inset Index idx
32184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32201 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32205 \begin_layout Standard
32206 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32207 and then use the menu
32209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32215 \begin_inset space ~
32220 or the toolbar button
32223 arg "nomencl-insert"
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32239 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32244 The first is the term or
32248 that you wish to define.
32253 of the term or symbol.
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32265 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32266 code for nomenclature entries the option
32270 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32278 \begin_layout Subsection
32279 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32280 \begin_inset Index idx
32283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32284 Nomenclature ! Layout
32292 \begin_layout Standard
32293 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32297 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32304 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32312 \begin_inset Newline newline
32320 \begin_inset Newline newline
32326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32333 character starts/ends the formula.
32334 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32335 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32347 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32357 \begin_layout Standard
32358 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32359 syntax is given in section
32360 \begin_inset space ~
32364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32366 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32373 \begin_layout Standard
32377 \begin_inset space ~
32382 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32384 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32389 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32396 in this document is:
32397 \begin_inset Newline newline
32402 dummy entry for the character
32407 \begin_inset Newline newline
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32429 font use the command
32458 \begin_layout Standard
32459 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32464 \begin_inset space \space{}
32468 \begin_inset Newline newline
32484 \begin_inset Newline newline
32487 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32488 This command will make the font of all symbols
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32504 If the characters |
32505 \begin_inset space \space{}
32509 \begin_inset space \space{}
32513 \begin_inset space \space{}
32517 \begin_inset space \space{}
32521 \begin_inset space \space{}
32524 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32525 code they need to be escaped
32526 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32527 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32528 LatexCommand nomenclature
32529 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32530 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32538 \begin_layout Subsection
32539 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32540 \begin_inset Index idx
32543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32544 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32552 \begin_layout Standard
32553 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32554 -code of the symbol
32556 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32558 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32561 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32562 LatexCommand nomenclature
32564 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32572 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32576 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32577 LatexCommand nomenclature
32580 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32586 They will be sorted by
32587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32613 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32616 will be sorted before the
32620 since the character
32621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32628 is considered in sorting.
32631 \begin_layout Standard
32632 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32640 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32641 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32643 For the example given, you can insert
32647 in this field for the
32648 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32655 will be located before
32656 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32678 \begin_layout Subsection
32679 Nomenclature Options
32680 \begin_inset Index idx
32683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 Nomenclature ! Options
32690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32692 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32704 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32705 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32708 \begin_layout Description
32709 refeq Appends the phrase
32710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32725 to every nomenclature entry, where
32731 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32734 \begin_layout Description
32735 refpage Appends the phrase
32736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32751 to every nomenclature entry, where
32757 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32760 \begin_layout Description
32761 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32764 \begin_layout Standard
32765 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32766 class options list in the
32768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32772 In this document the options
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32780 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32787 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32788 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32793 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32796 \begin_layout Description
32806 \begin_layout Description
32809 nomrefpage Like the
32816 \begin_layout Description
32819 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32828 \begin_layout Description
32832 \begin_inset space ~
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32843 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32846 \begin_layout Standard
32848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32855 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32856 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32869 \begin_inset Newline newline
32875 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32879 \begin_inset space ~
32891 unskip, see equation
32894 \begin_inset Newline newline
32901 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32902 \begin_inset Newline newline
32908 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32929 \begin_layout Standard
32930 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32938 in the document settings under
32941 \begin_inset space ~
32949 \begin_layout Standard
32957 \begin_inset Newline newline
32961 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32977 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32979 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32980 \begin_inset Newline newline
32987 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32988 \begin_inset Newline newline
32992 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32996 \begin_inset space ~
33008 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33013 \begin_layout Subsection
33014 Printing the Nomenclature
33015 \begin_inset Index idx
33018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33019 Nomenclature ! Printing
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33028 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33031 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33047 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33048 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33049 You can choose between these settings:
33052 \begin_layout Description
33053 Default a space of 1
33054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33060 \begin_layout Description
33062 \begin_inset space ~
33066 \begin_inset space ~
33069 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33072 \begin_layout Description
33073 Custom custom space
33076 \begin_layout Standard
33077 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33086 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33094 For example, in order to change the name to
33098 , add the following line to the preamble:
33101 \begin_layout Standard
33114 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33119 \begin_inset Newline newline
33134 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33137 \begin_layout Subsection
33138 Nomenclature Program
33139 \begin_inset Index idx
33142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33143 Nomenclature ! Program
33149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33151 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33164 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33165 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33167 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33172 by adding options, see section
33173 \begin_inset space ~
33177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33179 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33184 The available options are listed and explained in
33185 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33187 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33195 \begin_layout Section
33197 \begin_inset Index idx
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33207 \begin_inset Index idx
33210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33211 Document ! Branches
33217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33219 name "sec:Branches"
33226 \begin_layout Standard
33227 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33228 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33229 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33230 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33233 \begin_layout Standard
33234 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33235 allows you to put text into branches.
33236 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33237 To create a branch, either select the menu
33239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33243 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33252 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33253 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33254 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33255 and whether the name of the branch should
33256 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33257 (see below for an example).
33258 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33259 to the name of the other) and to add
33260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33272 \begin_inset space ~
33275 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33276 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33280 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33281 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33286 where you can choose a branch.
33287 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33291 \begin_layout Standard
33292 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33293 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33296 \begin_layout Standard
33297 \begin_inset Branch Question
33301 \begin_layout Standard
33306 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33314 \begin_layout Standard
33315 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33324 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33340 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33343 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33344 Consider for example a file
33345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33352 which has the above branches.
33354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33361 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33385 branch were inactive,
33386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33401 branch was active, likewise
33402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33417 branch was active, and
33418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33421 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33425 if both branches were active.
33426 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33427 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33433 \begin_layout Standard
33434 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33440 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33441 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33454 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33471 branch is deactivated.
33477 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33483 \begin_layout Standard
33484 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33485 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33486 definitions for each branch.
33487 For example you can define for the question branch
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33493 -syntax, see section
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33500 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33522 \begin_layout Standard
33532 \begin_layout Standard
33533 and for the answer branch
33536 \begin_layout Standard
33546 \begin_layout Standard
33556 \begin_layout Standard
33557 \begin_inset Branch Question
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33598 \begin_layout Standard
33602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33631 Now it is possible to use the
33635 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33642 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33645 commands to obtain conditional output.
33646 Here is an example formula where only the
33653 \begin_inset Formula
33655 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33673 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33679 \begin_inset space \space{}
33682 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33684 For this advanced usage, see the
33690 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33695 \begin_layout Section
33697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33699 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33704 \begin_inset Index idx
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33723 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33725 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33731 \begin_inset Index idx
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33736 packages ! hyperref
33741 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33742 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33743 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33744 part of the document.
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33749 The header information in the dialog tab
33753 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33754 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33755 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33756 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33769 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33770 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33771 and author entries.
33775 \begin_inset space ~
33779 \begin_inset space ~
33783 \begin_inset space ~
33788 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33791 \begin_layout Standard
33792 You can specify in the dialog tab
33796 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33801 \begin_inset space ~
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33809 \begin_inset space ~
33814 option allows long links to be split;
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33825 \begin_inset space ~
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33838 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33846 colors the different links.
33847 The default colors are:
33850 \begin_layout Labeling
33851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33856 for hyperlinks and URLs
33859 \begin_layout Labeling
33860 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33868 \begin_layout Labeling
33869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33877 \begin_layout Standard
33878 but you can change these in the field
33883 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33889 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33892 \begin_layout Standard
33897 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33898 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33899 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33907 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33908 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33909 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33919 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33920 when opening the PDF.
33922 \begin_inset space ~
33925 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33926 \begin_inset space ~
33929 1 will only display the sections.
33932 \begin_layout Standard
33933 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33934 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33940 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33951 \begin_layout Section
33953 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33957 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33964 \begin_layout Subsection
33967 \begin_inset Index idx
33970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33980 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33987 \begin_layout Standard
33988 As \SpecialChar LyX
33989 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33990 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33991 commands and constructs,
33994 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33995 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33996 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33997 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33998 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33999 cannot support all packages and
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34005 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34006 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34010 Code box is created by the menu
34012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34019 or by the toolbar button
34032 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34040 \begin_layout Standard
34041 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34043 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34045 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34050 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34055 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34062 , you can write the command part
34068 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34069 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34073 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34074 Code box behind the word.
34075 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34076 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34080 \begin_layout Standard
34081 \begin_inset Graphics
34082 filename clipart/ERT.png
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34095 This is a line with a
34099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34131 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34132 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34133 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 know that the command is finished.
34142 \begin_layout Subsection
34143 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34145 \begin_inset Argument 1
34148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34149 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34156 \begin_inset Index idx
34159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34169 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34177 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34178 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34179 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34180 uses in the background.
34181 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34182 is based on commands, you can
34183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34191 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34192 any time if you know the right commands.
34193 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34194 is the end of the day.
34195 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34196 all caption labels bold.
34197 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34199 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34203 \begin_layout Standard
34204 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34206 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34208 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34211 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 As result you find that the package
34227 \begin_inset Index idx
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34238 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34240 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34243 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34260 usepackage[options]{package name}
34263 \begin_layout Standard
34264 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34265 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34266 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34267 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 In your case the package name is
34276 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34281 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34282 So you add the command
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34290 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34294 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34299 For more commands provided by the
34303 package, have a look at its documentation,
34304 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34322 For example if you use a
34326 class, you don't need the package
34330 , you can instead write
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34338 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34345 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34346 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34353 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34358 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34360 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34361 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34362 Code box as described in the previous
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34368 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34373 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34381 \begin_layout Standard
34382 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34388 \begin_layout Standard
34392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34402 \begin_inset Note Note
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34414 \begin_layout Left Header
34415 \begin_inset Argument 1
34418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34438 \begin_inset Note Note
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 defines the header line as described below
34450 \begin_layout Center Header
34451 \begin_inset Argument 1
34454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 \begin_layout Right Header
34464 \begin_inset Argument 1
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34488 \begin_layout Left Footer
34489 \begin_inset Argument 1
34492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34513 \begin_layout Center Footer
34514 \begin_inset Argument 1
34517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34529 \begin_inset Newline newline
34533 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34539 \begin_layout Right Footer
34540 \begin_inset Argument 1
34543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34565 \begin_layout Section
34566 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34569 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34574 \begin_inset Index idx
34577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 Document ! Header/Footer line
34584 \begin_inset Index idx
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34597 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34601 \begin_inset space ~
34612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34618 \begin_inset space ~
34624 As a second step add in the menu
34626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34627 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34636 Custom Header/Footerlines
34639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34643 This module offers the following 6
34644 \begin_inset space ~
34650 \begin_layout Description
34652 \begin_inset space ~
34656 \begin_inset space ~
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34674 \begin_layout Description
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_inset space ~
34698 \begin_layout Standard
34699 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34700 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34705 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34713 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34717 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34720 \begin_layout Standard
34721 \begin_inset Float figure
34727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34730 \begin_inset Tabular
34731 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34732 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34733 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34734 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34735 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34784 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34799 The normal text on the page goes here.
34800 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34802 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34803 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34808 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34817 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34875 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34893 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34898 name "fig:Page-layout"
34902 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34915 \begin_layout Standard
34916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34924 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34933 is set to “Default”.
34934 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34943 \begin_layout Subsection
34947 \begin_layout Standard
34948 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34949 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34950 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34951 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34953 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34955 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34958 \begin_layout Standard
34959 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34960 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34974 \begin_layout Description
34977 thepage prints the current page number
34980 \begin_layout Description
34983 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34986 \begin_layout Description
34989 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34992 \begin_layout Description
34995 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34996 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35003 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35006 because it usually goes in a left header.
35009 \begin_layout Description
35012 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35013 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35015 It is normally used in the right header.
35018 \begin_layout Subsection
35019 Default header/footer
35022 \begin_layout Standard
35023 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35024 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35025 footer has the page number.
35026 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35027 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35028 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35039 \begin_layout Subsection
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35044 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35045 Some pages are different.
35046 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35047 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35048 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35049 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35050 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35054 Header and footer decoration line
35057 \begin_layout Standard
35058 By default, you get a 0.4
35059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35062 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35063 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35075 in the following way:
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35085 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35102 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35110 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35112 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35117 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35128 Several header/footer lines
35131 \begin_layout Standard
35132 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35133 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35134 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35136 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35152 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35162 \begin_layout Standard
35169 headheight}{height}
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35177 is a size in standard units (e.
35178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35182 \begin_inset space \space{}
35190 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35191 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35192 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35193 logfile with the menu
35195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35197 \begin_inset space ~
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35210 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35215 \begin_inset Index idx
35218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35220 packages ! fancyhdr
35226 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35227 for your header/footer.
35230 \begin_layout Subsection
35234 \begin_layout Standard
35235 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35236 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35237 This example consists of the following definition:
35240 \begin_layout Description
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35251 , empty optional argument
35254 \begin_layout Description
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35259 Header empty, empty optional argument
35262 \begin_layout Description
35264 \begin_inset space ~
35273 in the optional argument
35276 \begin_layout Description
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35287 in the optional argument
35290 \begin_layout Description
35292 \begin_inset space ~
35305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35309 \begin_inset Newline newline
35313 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35320 in the optional argument
35323 \begin_layout Description
35325 \begin_inset space ~
35334 , empty optional argument
35337 \begin_layout Description
35340 headrulewidth set to 2
35341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35348 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35349 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35372 \begin_layout Standard
35376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 pagestyle{headings}
35386 \begin_inset Note Note
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35390 switches back to page style with the default headings
35398 \begin_layout Section
35399 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35402 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35407 \begin_inset Index idx
35410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35417 \begin_inset Index idx
35420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35429 \begin_layout Standard
35431 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35432 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35433 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35436 \begin_layout Subsection
35440 \begin_layout Standard
35441 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35447 \begin_inset Index idx
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35452 packages ! preview-latex
35457 (on some systems named simply
35462 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35464 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35471 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35473 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35481 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35482 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35483 -package are automatically
35484 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35488 \begin_layout Subsection
35492 \begin_layout Standard
35493 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35494 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35496 activate the option
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35519 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35539 \begin_inset space ~
35544 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35553 \begin_inset space ~
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35571 and when you finish
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35584 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35585 generated by activating the option
35588 \begin_inset space ~
35594 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35602 \begin_layout Subsection
35603 Selected document parts
35606 \begin_layout Standard
35607 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35608 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35609 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35610 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35612 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35618 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35619 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35620 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35623 \begin_layout Standard
35624 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35631 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 is explained in section
35645 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35660 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35661 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35662 the final rotated boxes,
35663 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35664 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35666 Here is the result:
35669 \begin_layout Standard
35670 \begin_inset Preview
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35687 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35697 height_special "totalheight"
35702 backgroundcolor "none"
35705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35730 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35736 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_layout Standard
35759 Previewing works also for colors.
35760 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35779 is explained in section
35786 \begin_inset space ~
35799 \begin_layout Standard
35800 \begin_inset Preview
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35825 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35830 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35850 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35856 \begin_layout Standard
35857 If \SpecialChar LyX
35858 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35859 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35860 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35861 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35862 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35863 the \SpecialChar TeX
35865 If \SpecialChar LyX
35866 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35867 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35869 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35870 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35871 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35874 \begin_layout Subsection
35879 \begin_layout Standard
35880 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35881 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35884 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35891 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35893 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35895 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35896 's main window, then only this selection
35897 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35898 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35899 the source view window.
35904 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35905 ; but note that if you have
35906 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35908 not just the one which is open at the time.
35911 \begin_layout Section
35912 Advanced Find and Replace
35913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35915 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35920 \begin_inset Index idx
35923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35930 \begin_inset Index idx
35933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35942 \begin_layout Subsection
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35948 allows for searching of complex,
35949 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35951 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35952 The key-features are:
35955 \begin_layout Itemize
35956 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35957 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35958 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35962 \begin_layout Itemize
35963 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35964 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35965 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35966 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35969 \begin_layout Itemize
35970 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35971 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35972 outside of mathematics environments
35975 \begin_layout Itemize
35976 Search may be widened to a specific
35981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35988 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35989 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35996 \begin_layout Itemize
35997 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35998 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36003 \begin_inset space ~
36006 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36009 \begin_layout Subsection
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36014 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36016 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36029 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36032 ) or the toolbar button
36035 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36041 Advanced Find and Replace
36046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36050 \begin_layout Standard
36056 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36060 \begin_inset space ~
36065 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36068 arg "paragraph-break"
36072 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36073 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36077 arg "paragraph-break"
36080 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36084 searches backwards.
36087 \begin_layout Standard
36091 \begin_inset space ~
36096 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36110 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36114 Searching for mathematics
36117 \begin_layout Standard
36118 Mathematical formulas, such as
36119 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36122 or something more complex like
36123 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36126 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36131 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36132 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36133 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36134 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36140 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36144 \begin_layout Standard
36145 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36146 This is done by switching to the
36150 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36155 This way, entering in the
36162 \begin_layout Itemize
36163 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36164 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36167 \begin_layout Itemize
36168 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36169 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36172 \begin_layout Itemize
36173 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36174 of it only within section headings.
36175 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36176 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36180 \begin_layout Itemize
36181 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36182 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36189 \begin_layout Standard
36190 The entries made in the
36194 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36203 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36207 button or alternatively press
36210 arg "paragraph-break"
36217 while the cursor is in the
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36228 \begin_layout Standard
36229 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36231 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36235 \begin_layout Itemize
36236 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36237 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36245 with its typewriter version
36246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36260 \begin_layout Itemize
36261 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36267 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36279 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36286 (you may want to enable the
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36302 options and disable the
36310 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36318 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36319 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36323 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36326 , or occurrences of
36327 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36331 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36337 \begin_layout Subsection
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36342 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36347 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36351 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36361 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36367 This is done with the context menu
36369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36370 Insert Regular Expression
36372 while the cursor is in the
36377 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36378 expression matching rules
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36393 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36394 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36400 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36401 same text in the document.
36402 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36403 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36406 \begin_layout Enumerate
36407 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36412 editor the fraction
36413 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36417 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36420 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36421 fractions with the given denominator.
36424 \begin_layout Enumerate
36425 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36437 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36442 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36443 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36444 Also, by inserting a
36445 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36448 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36449 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36452 \begin_layout Standard
36453 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36454 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36455 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36458 , and referring back to them through
36459 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36463 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36467 For example, try searching with the regexp
36468 \begin_inset Newline newline
36471 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36474 \begin_inset Newline newline
36477 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36481 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36484 \begin_layout Standard
36485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36493 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36494 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36495 sub-expressions is absolute.
36497 \begin_inset space ~
36501 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36504 always refers to the first occurrence of
36505 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36508 in all entered regexps.
36516 \begin_layout Section
36518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36520 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36525 \begin_inset Index idx
36528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36539 has a built-in spell checker.
36542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36549 key or the toolbar button
36552 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36555 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36556 beginning of the currently selected text.
36557 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36558 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36559 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36560 scrolled so that it is visible.
36561 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36562 n, if any could be found.
36563 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36567 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36568 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36571 \begin_layout Standard
36572 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36579 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36580 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36582 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36583 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36594 arg "dialog-show character"
36597 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36599 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36602 \begin_layout Standard
36603 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36604 can be downloaded from here:
36605 \begin_inset Newline newline
36609 \begin_inset Flex URL
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36614 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36620 \begin_inset Newline newline
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36627 files for each language.
36628 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36632 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36633 's installation subfolder
36641 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36643 \begin_inset Newline newline
36646 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36647 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36648 but in most cases these are
36664 is the language code.
36667 \begin_layout Subsection
36671 \begin_layout Standard
36674 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36675 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36683 you can set the following things:
36686 \begin_layout Description
36688 \begin_inset space ~
36691 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36692 should use for spell checking.
36693 Depending on your platform,
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36705 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36723 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36726 \begin_layout Description
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36731 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36732 will always use the given language
36733 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36736 \begin_layout Description
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36741 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36747 \begin_inset space \space{}
36751 This should normally not be needed.
36754 \begin_layout Description
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36763 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36775 \begin_layout Description
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36780 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36781 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36782 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36783 appear in a context menu.
36784 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36788 \begin_layout Description
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36801 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36805 \begin_layout Section
36807 \begin_inset Index idx
36810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36819 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36828 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36829 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36841 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36851 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36853 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36854 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36855 which are available for many languages.
36858 \begin_layout Standard
36859 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36860 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36864 \begin_layout Subsection
36865 Setting up the thesaurus
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36877 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36881 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36886 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36892 \begin_inset space ~
36900 For instance, the US English files are named:
36903 \begin_layout Itemize
36907 \begin_layout Itemize
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36920 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36921 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36924 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36925 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36926 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36928 \begin_inset space ~
36933 ) to the path where they are installed.
36937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36938 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36939 ies, typical locations are
36945 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36949 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36953 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36956 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36962 LibreOffice-<Version>
36969 On the Mac, the default location is
36971 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36972 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36973 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36974 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36975 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36976 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36984 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36985 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36986 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36990 \begin_layout Standard
36991 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36992 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36994 \begin_inset Newline newline
36998 \begin_inset Flex URL
37001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37003 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37011 \begin_layout Standard
37012 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37013 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37015 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37016 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37017 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37024 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37026 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37027 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37034 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37037 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37043 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37046 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37047 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37056 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37057 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37064 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37067 \begin_layout Subsection
37068 Using the thesaurus
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37077 or the toolbar button
37080 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37083 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37085 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37087 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37088 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37089 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37098 ), related terms (such as
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37110 ), compounds (such as
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37122 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37131 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37135 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37136 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37140 \begin_layout Standard
37141 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37142 the dictionary, such as the above
37146 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37151 \begin_inset space \space{}
37154 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37155 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37156 For example, looking up the word form
37160 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37165 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37170 \begin_inset space \space{}
37181 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37182 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37183 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37186 \begin_layout Section
37188 \begin_inset Index idx
37191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37198 \begin_inset Index idx
37201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37202 Document ! Change Tracking
37208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37210 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37217 \begin_layout Standard
37218 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37219 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37220 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37221 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37225 \begin_inset space ~
37228 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_layout Standard
37239 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37253 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37254 You can change the color in
37256 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37257 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37268 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37274 \begin_inset Index idx
37277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37278 Color ! Change tracking
37283 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37284 's status bar when the
37285 cursor is in changed text.
37286 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37289 arg "changes-merge"
37295 \begin_layout Standard
37296 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37298 \begin_inset Index idx
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37310 \begin_layout Standard
37311 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37317 \begin_layout Standard
37318 \begin_inset Graphics
37319 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37335 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37338 \begin_layout Standard
37339 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 \begin_inset Tabular
37347 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37348 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37360 arg "changes-track"
37368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37379 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37399 arg "changes-output"
37407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37418 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37420 \begin_inset space ~
37424 \begin_inset space ~
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37458 Jumps to the next change
37464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37473 arg "change-accept"
37481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37492 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37512 arg "change-reject"
37520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37531 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37533 \begin_inset space ~
37542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37551 arg "changes-merge"
37559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37570 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37590 arg "all-changes-accept"
37598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37609 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37633 arg "all-changes-reject"
37641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37649 \begin_inset space ~
37652 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37654 \begin_inset space ~
37658 \begin_inset space ~
37667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37691 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37693 \begin_inset space ~
37702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37725 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37727 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37750 \begin_layout Standard
37751 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37773 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37774 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37775 the next change after the current cursor position.
37776 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37777 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37778 step to the next change.
37779 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37782 \begin_layout Standard
37783 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37784 to describe a change.
37787 \begin_layout Standard
37788 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37794 \begin_inset Index idx
37797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37805 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37807 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37814 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37818 \begin_layout Section
37819 Comparison of Documents
37820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37822 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37827 \begin_inset Index idx
37830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37831 Comparison of documents
37839 \begin_layout Standard
37840 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37843 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37847 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37848 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37850 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37852 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37885 \begin_inset space ~
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37898 enables the change tracking option
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37914 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37917 \begin_layout Section
37918 International Support
37919 \begin_inset Index idx
37922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37923 International support
37931 \begin_layout Standard
37932 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37933 with any language you want.
37934 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37935 up \SpecialChar LyX
37937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37939 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37949 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37956 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37965 \begin_inset Index idx
37968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37975 \begin_inset Index idx
37978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 Document ! Settings
37985 \begin_inset Index idx
37988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 Document ! Language
37997 \begin_layout Standard
38000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38001 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38004 dialog lets you set
38006 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38016 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38026 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38027 For details about the different encoding options see section
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38034 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38041 \begin_layout Subsection
38042 Keyboard mapping configuration
38043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38045 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 If you have for example a U.
38054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38057 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38058 can use an alternate keymap.
38059 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38065 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38066 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38069 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38076 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38081 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38082 which one you want to use.
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38087 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38088 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38092 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38093 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38094 one to support the characters you want.
38095 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38102 \begin_layout Chapter
38105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38107 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38114 \begin_layout Standard
38115 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38116 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38117 topic inside the user's guide.
38120 \begin_layout Section
38122 \begin_inset Index idx
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38139 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38142 \begin_layout Subsection
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 Creates a new document.
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38156 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38157 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38160 \begin_layout Subsection
38164 \begin_layout Standard
38168 \begin_layout Subsection
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38174 Click there on a file to open it.
38177 \begin_layout Subsection
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 Closes the current document.
38185 \begin_layout Subsection
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 Closes all opened documents.
38193 \begin_layout Subsection
38197 \begin_layout Standard
38198 Saves the actual document.
38201 \begin_layout Subsection
38205 \begin_layout Standard
38206 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38209 \begin_layout Subsection
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 Saves all opened documents.
38217 \begin_layout Subsection
38221 \begin_layout Standard
38222 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38225 \begin_layout Subsection
38229 \begin_layout Standard
38230 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38231 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38232 It is described in the section
38234 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38239 Additional Features
38244 \begin_layout Subsection
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38249 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38250 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38252 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38253 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 When using the menu entry
38261 \begin_inset space ~
38266 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38283 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38284 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38287 \begin_layout Subsection
38289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38291 name "subsec:Export"
38298 \begin_layout Standard
38299 You can export your document to various file formats.
38300 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38302 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38303 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38304 during its configuration.
38307 \begin_layout Standard
38308 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38316 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38323 \begin_layout Description
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38332 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38337 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38338 \begin_inset Newline newline
38341 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38342 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38346 \begin_layout Description
38347 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38353 \begin_layout Description
38355 \begin_inset space ~
38358 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38364 \begin_layout Description
38365 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38366 's native DVI-format.
38367 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38368 files paths or file names in your document.
38370 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38377 \begin_layout Description
38378 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38379 in files paths or file names
38382 \begin_layout Description
38384 \begin_inset space ~
38391 ) DVI-format using the program
38393 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38396 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38416 \begin_layout Description
38418 \begin_inset space ~
38421 (cropped) the same as
38425 but with cropped page margins.
38428 \begin_layout Description
38430 \begin_inset space ~
38433 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38437 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38442 \begin_layout Description
38446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38462 \begin_layout Description
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38468 \begin_inset space ~
38471 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38475 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38483 \begin_layout Description
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38496 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38497 source that is compilable with the program
38499 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38503 \begin_layout Description
38507 \begin_inset space ~
38512 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38513 source, additionally all images used in the document
38514 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38518 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38521 \begin_layout Description
38525 \begin_inset space ~
38530 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38531 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38532 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38540 \begin_layout Description
38544 \begin_inset space ~
38553 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38554 source that is compilable with the program
38560 \begin_layout Description
38562 \begin_inset space ~
38566 \begin_inset space ~
38573 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38574 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38580 \begin_layout Description
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38585 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38586 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38592 \begin_inset space \space{}
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38616 represent the version number)
38619 \begin_layout Description
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38628 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38629 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38630 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38634 \begin_layout Description
38635 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38636 's internal XHTML engine
38639 \begin_layout Description
38641 \begin_inset space ~
38645 \begin_inset space ~
38649 \begin_inset space ~
38653 \begin_inset space ~
38656 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38661 For the conversion the program
38670 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38673 \begin_layout Description
38674 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38679 \begin_layout Description
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38684 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38686 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38689 For the conversion the program
38698 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38701 \begin_layout Description
38703 \begin_inset space ~
38706 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38707 For the conversion the program
38716 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38719 \begin_layout Description
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38724 (cropped) the same as
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38732 but with cropped page margins
38735 \begin_layout Description
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38744 PDF-format using the program
38748 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38751 \begin_layout Description
38755 \begin_inset space ~
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38772 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38777 \begin_inset space \space{}
38780 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38784 \begin_layout Description
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38793 PDF-format using the program
38795 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38798 , produces PDF-files directly
38801 \begin_layout Description
38805 \begin_inset space ~
38810 PDF-format using the program
38814 , produces PDF-files directly
38817 \begin_layout Description
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38826 PDF-format using the program
38830 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38833 \begin_layout Description
38837 \begin_inset space ~
38842 PDF-format using the program
38847 , produces PDF-files directly
38850 \begin_layout Description
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38862 \begin_layout Description
38866 \begin_inset space ~
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38875 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38876 and then exported as text using the program
38881 \begin_layout Description
38886 PostScript format using the program
38894 options see section
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38901 reference "subsec:General-output"
38908 \begin_layout Description
38909 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38910 source and also code in the statistical programming
38924 it is possible to use
38928 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38932 \begin_layout Standard
38933 If one of the menu entries
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38949 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38951 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38959 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38964 \begin_inset Index idx
38967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38977 \begin_layout Subsection
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38983 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38992 reference "sec:Paths"
38997 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39006 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39007 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39008 's preferences as described in section
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39015 reference "subsec:Converters"
39022 \begin_layout Subsection
39023 New and Close Window
39026 \begin_layout Standard
39027 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39031 \begin_layout Subsection
39035 \begin_layout Standard
39036 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39039 \begin_layout Section
39041 \begin_inset Index idx
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 \begin_layout Subsection
39057 \begin_layout Standard
39058 Described in section
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39065 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39072 \begin_layout Subsection
39073 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39076 \begin_layout Standard
39077 Described in section
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39084 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39091 \begin_layout Subsection
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39096 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39097 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39100 \begin_layout Subsection
39104 \begin_layout Standard
39105 Selects the whole document.
39108 \begin_layout Subsection
39109 Find & Replace (Quick)
39112 \begin_layout Standard
39113 Described in section
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39120 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39127 \begin_layout Subsection
39128 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39131 \begin_layout Standard
39132 Described in section
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39139 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39146 \begin_layout Subsection
39147 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39150 \begin_layout Standard
39151 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39155 \begin_layout Subsection
39157 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39161 \begin_layout Standard
39163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39164 Described in section
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39171 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39180 \begin_layout Subsection
39182 \begin_inset Index idx
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 Paragraph ! Settings
39194 \begin_layout Standard
39195 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39196 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39200 \begin_layout Standard
39201 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39202 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39221 \begin_layout Subsection
39223 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39227 \begin_layout Standard
39229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39230 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39235 \begin_layout Enumerate
39237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39238 Customize text properties by means of the
39244 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39247 ; this is described in section
39248 \begin_inset space ~
39252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39254 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39261 \begin_layout Enumerate
39263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39264 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39266 Apply last settings
39269 \begin_layout Enumerate
39271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39272 Change the casing of selected text (
39287 \begin_layout Subsection
39289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39293 \begin_layout Standard
39295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39296 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39297 text styles (in the case of this document:
39319 \begin_inset space ~
39323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39325 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39334 \begin_layout Subsection
39335 Table and Rows & Columns
39338 \begin_layout Standard
39339 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39340 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39341 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39344 \begin_layout Subsection
39348 \begin_layout Standard
39349 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39350 It will dissolve this inset.
39351 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39355 \begin_layout Subsection
39359 \begin_layout Standard
39360 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39361 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39364 \begin_layout Subsection
39365 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39368 \begin_layout Standard
39369 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39371 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39378 reference "sec:Nesting"
39383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39385 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39392 \begin_layout Section
39394 \begin_inset Index idx
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 \begin_layout Standard
39407 At the bottom of the
39411 menu the opened documents are listed.
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39415 Open/Close all Insets
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39422 \begin_layout Subsection
39423 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39426 \begin_layout Standard
39427 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39430 \begin_layout Standard
39431 Math macros are described in the
39438 \begin_layout Subsection
39442 \begin_layout Standard
39443 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39450 reference "sec:Navigating"
39455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39457 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39464 \begin_layout Subsection
39468 \begin_layout Standard
39469 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39471 \begin_inset space ~
39475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39477 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39484 \begin_layout Subsection
39488 \begin_layout Standard
39489 Opens a window showing console messages.
39490 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39495 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39496 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39497 is processing the document.
39500 \begin_layout Subsection
39502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39504 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39509 \begin_inset Index idx
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 \begin_layout Standard
39522 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39524 All toolbars and the
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39532 can be turned on and off.
39537 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39566 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39570 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39582 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39586 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39587 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39588 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39589 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39590 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39595 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39596 \begin_inset space ~
39600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39602 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39609 \begin_layout Subsection
39613 \begin_layout Standard
39617 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset space ~
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39637 \begin_inset space ~
39642 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39643 's main window vertically while
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset space ~
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39671 will split it horizontally.
39672 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39673 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39674 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39675 three or more documents at the same time.
39676 To close a split view, use the menu
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39691 \begin_layout Subsection
39695 \begin_layout Standard
39696 Closes a split view.
39699 \begin_layout Subsection
39703 \begin_layout Standard
39704 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39705 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39706 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39707 's main window fullscreen.
39708 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39709 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39712 \begin_layout Section
39714 \begin_inset Index idx
39717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39726 \begin_layout Subsection
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39731 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39738 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39749 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39753 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39760 \begin_layout Standard
39761 Here you can insert the following characters:
39764 \begin_layout Description
39769 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39772 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39773 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39774 -packages you have installed.
39775 You can get a complete display by checking
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39784 \begin_inset Newline newline
39788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39796 Not all characters will be visible in the
39800 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39801 dialog (see section
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39808 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39812 ) can display every character.
39820 \begin_layout Description
39821 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39825 \begin_layout Description
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39834 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39841 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39848 \begin_layout Description
39850 \begin_inset space ~
39853 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39857 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39863 \begin_layout Description
39865 \begin_inset space ~
39868 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39878 \begin_layout Description
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39883 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39887 \begin_layout Description
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39892 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39896 \begin_layout Description
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39901 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39907 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39913 \begin_layout Description
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39918 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39922 \begin_layout Description
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39928 \begin_inset Index idx
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39938 \begin_inset Index idx
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39942 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39947 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39948 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39950 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39956 \begin_inset Index idx
39959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 \begin_inset Newline newline
39970 More information about this feature can be found in the
39976 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 \begin_layout Description
39983 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39985 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39986 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39990 \begin_layout Subsection
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39995 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39998 \begin_layout Description
39999 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40000 \begin_inset script superscript
40002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 \begin_layout Description
40012 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40013 \begin_inset script subscript
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 \begin_layout Description
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40029 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40030 \begin_inset space ~
40034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40036 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40043 \begin_layout Description
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40048 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40055 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40062 \begin_layout Description
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40067 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40068 \begin_inset space ~
40072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40074 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40081 \begin_layout Description
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40086 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40092 \begin_inset space \space{}
40095 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40096 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40105 To insert a fraction use the command
40110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40114 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40123 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40130 \begin_layout Description
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40135 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40142 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40149 \begin_layout Description
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40154 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40155 \begin_inset space ~
40159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40161 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40168 \begin_layout Description
40170 \begin_inset space ~
40173 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40180 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40187 \begin_layout Description
40188 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40195 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40202 \begin_layout Description
40204 \begin_inset space ~
40207 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40214 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40221 \begin_layout Description
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40226 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40233 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40240 \begin_layout Description
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_inset space ~
40249 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40258 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40265 for a usage example.
40268 \begin_layout Description
40270 \begin_inset space ~
40274 \begin_inset space ~
40277 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40284 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40291 \begin_layout Description
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40296 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40297 as described in section
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40304 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40311 \begin_layout Description
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40316 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40317 \begin_inset space ~
40321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40323 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40330 \begin_layout Description
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40335 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40336 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40344 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40351 \begin_layout Description
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40356 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40363 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40370 \begin_layout Description
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40379 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40386 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40393 \begin_layout Subsection
40397 \begin_layout Standard
40398 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40423 are described in section
40424 \begin_inset space ~
40428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40430 reference "sec:toc"
40439 is described in section
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40446 reference "sec:Index"
40454 is described in section
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40461 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40467 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40470 is described in section
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40477 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40484 \begin_layout Subsection
40488 \begin_layout Standard
40489 To insert floats, as described in section
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "sec:Floats"
40500 and in detail the chapter
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40515 \begin_layout Subsection
40519 \begin_layout Standard
40520 To insert notes, described in section
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40527 reference "sec:Notes"
40534 \begin_layout Subsection
40538 \begin_layout Standard
40539 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40541 Branches are described in section
40542 \begin_inset space ~
40546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40548 reference "sec:Branches"
40555 \begin_layout Subsection
40559 \begin_layout Standard
40560 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40561 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40563 An example is the document class
40564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40571 with three custom insets.
40574 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40578 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40584 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40587 \begin_layout Subsection
40589 \begin_inset Index idx
40592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40601 \begin_layout Standard
40602 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40604 For more information see chapter
40606 External Document Parts
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40615 \begin_layout Subsection
40617 \begin_inset Index idx
40620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40629 \begin_layout Standard
40630 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40631 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40646 \begin_layout Subsection
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40655 dialog as described in section
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40662 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40669 \begin_layout Subsection
40673 \begin_layout Standard
40678 as described in section
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40685 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40692 \begin_layout Subsection
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40701 as described in section
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40708 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40715 \begin_layout Subsection
40717 \begin_inset Index idx
40720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40727 \begin_inset Index idx
40730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40731 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40741 Floats are described in section
40742 \begin_inset space ~
40746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40748 reference "sec:Floats"
40752 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40754 Multi-page Captions
40759 \begin_inset space ~
40767 \begin_layout Subsection
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40772 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40779 reference "sec:Index"
40786 \begin_layout Subsection
40790 \begin_layout Standard
40791 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40798 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40805 \begin_layout Subsection
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40811 Tables are described in section
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40818 reference "sec:Tables"
40822 and in detail in the chapter
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_layout Subsection
40841 \begin_layout Standard
40847 Graphics are described in section
40848 \begin_inset space ~
40852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40854 reference "sec:Graphics"
40861 \begin_layout Subsection
40865 \begin_layout Standard
40866 Inserts a URL as described in section
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40873 reference "subsec:URLs"
40880 \begin_layout Subsection
40884 \begin_layout Standard
40885 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40892 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40899 \begin_layout Subsection
40903 \begin_layout Standard
40904 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40911 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40918 \begin_layout Subsection
40922 \begin_layout Standard
40923 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40930 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40937 \begin_layout Subsection
40940 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
40943 \begin_layout Standard
40944 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40945 environments of the same type.
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40953 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40957 for an explanation.
40960 \begin_layout Subsection
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40965 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40966 title or caption of a float.
40967 Inserts a short title as described in section
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40974 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40981 \begin_layout Subsection
40986 \begin_layout Standard
40987 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40988 Code box as described in section
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40995 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41002 \begin_layout Subsection
41004 \begin_inset Index idx
41007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41016 \begin_layout Standard
41017 Inserts a program listings box.
41018 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41020 Program Code Listings
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_layout Subsection
41037 \begin_layout Standard
41038 Inserts the actual date.
41039 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41044 \begin_layout Subsection
41048 \begin_layout Standard
41049 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41056 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41063 \begin_layout Section
41065 \begin_inset Index idx
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41078 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41079 \begin_inset space ~
41082 of the current document.
41083 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41086 \begin_layout Subsection
41090 \begin_layout Standard
41091 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41092 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41093 to jump, for example, between section
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41098 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41102 2.5 and use the submenu
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41132 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41136 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41142 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41145 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41148 \begin_layout Standard
41149 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41158 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41161 \begin_inset space ~
41166 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41169 \begin_layout Subsection
41170 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41173 \begin_layout Standard
41174 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41178 \begin_layout Subsection
41182 \begin_layout Standard
41183 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41184 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41185 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_layout Subsection
41205 \begin_layout Standard
41206 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41209 The \SpecialChar LyX
41210 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41225 manual for a detailed description.
41228 \begin_layout Section
41230 \begin_inset Index idx
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41242 \begin_layout Subsection
41246 \begin_layout Standard
41247 Change Tracking is described in section
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41254 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41261 \begin_layout Subsection
41269 \begin_layout Standard
41270 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41271 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41272 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41274 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41275 to the clipboard or update the view.
41276 \begin_inset Newline newline
41279 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41283 \begin_layout Standard
41286 Open Containing Directory
41288 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41289 's temporary folder for the document.
41290 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41291 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41292 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41293 For example some journals require to send the
41297 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41301 \begin_layout Subsection
41302 Start Appendix Here
41305 \begin_layout Standard
41306 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41307 as described in section
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41314 reference "sec:Appendices"
41321 \begin_layout Subsection
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_layout Standard
41330 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41331 default output format for the document (menu
41333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41334 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41335 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41353 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41357 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41360 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41361 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41366 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41371 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41389 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41393 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41394 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41396 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41397 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41402 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41407 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41417 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41422 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41423 when it is first configured.
41424 The default output format is
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_layout Subsection
41436 View (Other Formats)
41439 \begin_layout Standard
41440 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41441 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41442 actual document with an external program.
41443 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41444 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41445 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41447 All possible formats are listed in section
41448 \begin_inset space ~
41452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41454 reference "subsec:Export"
41459 You should at least see the menu entry
41464 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41466 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41474 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41479 \begin_inset Index idx
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41492 \begin_layout Standard
41493 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41494 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41497 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41502 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41507 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41517 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41522 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41523 when it is first configured.
41526 \begin_layout Subsection
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41535 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41536 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41539 \begin_layout Subsection
41540 Update (Other Formats)
41543 \begin_layout Standard
41544 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41545 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41548 \begin_layout Subsection
41549 View Master Document
41552 \begin_layout Standard
41553 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41574 manual for more information on this topic).
41575 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41576 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41589 generates the output of the whole book, while
41593 will just output the chapter alone.
41596 \begin_layout Standard
41597 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41598 in the document settings (menu
41600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41601 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41602 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41614 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41620 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41624 ) or in the preferences (menu
41626 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41627 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41632 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41637 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41655 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41662 \begin_layout Subsection
41663 Update Master Document
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41667 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41688 manual for more information on this topic).
41689 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41690 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41693 \begin_layout Standard
41694 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41695 in the document settings (menu
41697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41698 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41699 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41701 \begin_inset space ~
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41717 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41721 ) or in the preferences (menu
41723 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41724 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41729 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41734 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41752 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41759 \begin_layout Subsection
41761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41763 name "subsec:Compressed"
41770 \begin_layout Standard
41771 Un/compresses the current document.
41772 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41773 compression (see the
41775 Additional Features
41777 manual for details).
41780 \begin_layout Subsection
41784 \begin_layout Standard
41785 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41788 \begin_layout Subsection
41792 \begin_layout Standard
41793 The document settings are described in appendix
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41800 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41807 \begin_layout Section
41809 \begin_inset Index idx
41812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41821 \begin_layout Subsection
41825 \begin_layout Standard
41826 Spell checking is explained in section
41827 \begin_inset space ~
41831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41833 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41840 \begin_layout Subsection
41844 \begin_layout Standard
41845 The thesaurus is described in section
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41852 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41859 \begin_layout Subsection
41861 \begin_inset Index idx
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 \begin_inset Index idx
41874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41885 the highlighted document part.
41888 \begin_layout Subsection
41894 \begin_inset Index idx
41897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41898 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41907 \begin_layout Standard
41908 Generates with the help of the program
41910 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41913 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41914 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41915 This feature is not available on Windows.
41918 \begin_layout Subsection
41924 \begin_inset Index idx
41927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41938 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41948 to see the full filename paths.
41951 \begin_layout Subsection
41953 \begin_inset Index idx
41956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41966 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41967 files as described in section
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41974 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41981 \begin_layout Subsection
41983 \begin_inset Index idx
41986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 \begin_inset Index idx
42020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42021 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42030 \begin_layout Standard
42031 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42032 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42033 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42034 -packages and programs it needs; see
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42042 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42049 \begin_layout Subsection
42053 \begin_layout Standard
42058 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42059 \begin_inset space ~
42063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42065 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42072 \begin_layout Section
42074 \begin_inset Index idx
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42086 \begin_layout Standard
42087 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42088 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42090 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42094 \begin_layout Standard
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42103 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42104 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42105 packages and classes found
42106 by \SpecialChar LyX
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42114 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42125 \begin_inset space ~
42130 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42135 \begin_layout Section
42137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42139 name "sec:Toolbars"
42146 \begin_layout Standard
42147 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42154 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42161 \begin_layout Standard
42162 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42163 This is described in the
42165 Additional Features
42170 \begin_layout Subsection
42172 \begin_inset Index idx
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42185 \begin_inset Graphics
42186 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42194 \begin_layout Standard
42195 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42201 \begin_layout Standard
42202 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 \begin_inset Note Note
42222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42223 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42228 manual for more information.
42236 \begin_layout Standard
42237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42243 \begin_layout Standard
42244 \begin_inset Tabular
42245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42246 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42254 \begin_inset Graphics
42255 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 pull-down box for the environments
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42283 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42289 \begin_layout Standard
42291 \begin_inset Tabular
42292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42293 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42294 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42295 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42319 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42349 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42379 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42409 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 arg "spelling-continuously"
42433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 Spellcheck continuously
42443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42466 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42656 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42698 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42699 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42727 Emphasize text, function of the
42728 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42733 \begin_inset space ~
42736 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42738 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42744 arg "dialog-show character"
42755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42776 Set text to noun style, function of the
42777 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42782 \begin_inset space ~
42785 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42787 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
42793 arg "dialog-show character"
42804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 arg "textstyle-apply"
42821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42825 Format text using the current settings in the
42826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758229
42829 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42834 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42836 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758229
42842 arg "dialog-show character"
42853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42877 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42897 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 arg "tabular-insert"
42933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42955 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42967 Toggle outline window on/off,
42969 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42985 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43024 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43037 \begin_layout Subsection
43039 \begin_inset Index idx
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43051 \begin_layout Standard
43052 \begin_inset Graphics
43053 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43061 \begin_layout Standard
43062 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43069 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43074 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43081 \begin_inset Tabular
43082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43083 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43084 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43085 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43086 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43122 arg "layout Enumerate"
43130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43149 arg "layout Itemize"
43157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 arg "layout Description"
43211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43230 arg "depth-increment"
43238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43268 arg "depth-decrement"
43276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43282 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43306 arg "float-insert figure"
43314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43320 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43321 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43337 arg "float-insert table"
43345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43352 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43398 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43428 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43492 arg "nomencl-insert"
43500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43508 \begin_inset space ~
43517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43526 arg "footnote-insert"
43534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43547 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43605 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43625 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43701 \begin_inset space ~
43710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43719 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43734 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43750 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43765 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 arg "dialog-show character"
43793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43799 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43801 \begin_inset space ~
43804 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43820 arg "layout-paragraph"
43828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43868 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43882 \begin_layout Subsection
43883 View/Update Toolbar
43884 \begin_inset Index idx
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 Toolbar ! View / Update
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 \begin_inset Graphics
43898 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43913 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43917 \begin_layout Standard
43918 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43924 \begin_layout Standard
43925 \begin_inset Tabular
43926 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43927 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43928 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43929 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 arg "buffer-update"
43977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43990 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 arg "master-buffer-view"
44007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44033 arg "master-buffer-update"
44041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44071 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44086 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44087 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44088 Synchronize with Output
44094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44118 View (Other Formats)
44124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 arg "update-others"
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44146 Update (Other Formats)
44159 \begin_layout Standard
44160 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44164 \begin_layout Subsection
44168 \begin_layout Standard
44169 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44170 \begin_inset space ~
44174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44176 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44180 , the table toolbar
44181 \begin_inset Index idx
44184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44198 manual and the math macro toolbar
44199 \begin_inset Index idx
44202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 \begin_layout Chapter
44216 The Document Settings
44217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44219 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44224 \begin_inset Index idx
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44228 Document ! Settings
44236 \begin_layout Standard
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44245 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44246 is called with the menu
44248 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44252 You can save your document settings as default with the
44254 Save as Document Defaults
44256 button in any dialog.
44257 This will create a template named
44261 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44262 when you create a new document without
44266 \begin_layout Standard
44271 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44272 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44275 \begin_layout Standard
44276 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44277 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44278 to find the one you are looking for.
44279 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44280 the submenus of the dialog.
44282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44286 \begin_inset space \space{}
44290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44297 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44298 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44299 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44302 \begin_layout Section
44306 \begin_layout Standard
44307 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44309 Document classes are described in section
44310 \begin_inset space ~
44314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44316 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44333 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44338 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44339 as a layout for a document class.
44340 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44342 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44351 \begin_layout Standard
44352 Some classes use special class options by default.
44353 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44357 and you can decide to use them or not.
44358 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44359 recommended you leave them untouched.
44364 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44365 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44370 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44372 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44379 \begin_inset Newline newline
44384 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44387 \begin_inset Newline newline
44390 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44391 distribution, see section
44396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44398 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44411 \begin_layout Standard
44416 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44417 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44418 in the background if the child document
44419 is opened without its master.
44420 This way child documents are always compilable.
44421 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44428 \begin_inset space ~
44436 \begin_layout Standard
44437 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44448 \begin_inset Index idx
44451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44453 packages ! prettyref
44459 \begin_inset Index idx
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 packages ! refstyle
44469 for cross-references, see section
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44476 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44483 \begin_layout Section
44487 \begin_layout Standard
44488 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44489 Please refer to the section
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44505 manual for details.
44508 \begin_layout Section
44512 \begin_layout Standard
44513 Modules are explained in section
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44520 reference "subsec:Modules"
44527 \begin_layout Section
44531 \begin_layout Standard
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44539 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44546 \begin_layout Section
44550 \begin_layout Standard
44551 The document font settings are described in section
44552 \begin_inset space ~
44556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44558 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44565 \begin_layout Section
44569 \begin_layout Standard
44570 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44582 \begin_inset space ~
44587 and whether it should be a
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44595 can also be specified here.
44598 \begin_layout Standard
44599 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44600 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44601 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44603 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44606 \begin_layout Standard
44609 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44612 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44613 justifies the text on screen.
44614 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44618 \begin_layout Section
44622 \begin_layout Standard
44623 This dialog is described in sections
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44630 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44637 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44644 \begin_layout Section
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44650 \begin_inset space ~
44654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44656 reference "subsec:Margins"
44663 \begin_layout Section
44665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44667 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44672 \begin_inset Index idx
44675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44676 Language ! Encoding
44684 \begin_layout Standard
44685 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44686 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44687 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44689 is always encoded in utf8).
44690 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44691 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44692 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44693 -command is not known for
44694 a particular character).
44697 \begin_layout Standard
44698 If you use the option
44703 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44704 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44705 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44707 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44708 exactly one encoding.
44709 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44712 \begin_layout Standard
44714 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44715 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44716 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44717 installation supports Unicode), choose
44718 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44719 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44720 is quite incomplete, so
44721 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44726 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44727 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44728 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44729 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44730 -commands is not used, because all
44731 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44732 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44733 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44734 , two new alternative engines
44735 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44737 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44739 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44750 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44764 \begin_inset space ~
44768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44770 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44775 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44779 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44782 \begin_layout Standard
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44791 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44792 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44802 The possible settings are:
44805 \begin_layout Description
44806 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44808 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44809 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44819 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44826 \begin_layout Description
44827 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44828 format you will use.
44829 In many cases this will be
44834 \begin_inset Index idx
44837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 If the newer package
44850 \begin_inset Index idx
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 packages ! polyglossia
44860 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44861 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44862 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
44864 this package will be used instead of
44871 \begin_layout Description
44873 \begin_inset space ~
44884 would be more appropriate.
44887 \begin_layout Description
44888 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
44889 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
44893 (for German texts), type in
44896 \begin_inset Newline newline
44901 usepackage{ngerman}
44904 \begin_layout Description
44905 None will not use a language package.
44906 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44910 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44913 \begin_layout Description
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44919 \begin_inset space ~
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44930 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44936 \begin_inset Index idx
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44941 packages ! inputenc
44947 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44948 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44949 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44953 \begin_layout Description
44954 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44956 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44957 commands, which may result in a big
44958 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44959 -commands are needed.
44962 \begin_layout Description
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44968 \begin_inset space ~
44971 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44974 \begin_layout Description
44976 \begin_inset space ~
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44983 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44986 \begin_layout Description
44988 \begin_inset space ~
44991 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44994 \begin_layout Description
44996 \begin_inset space ~
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45003 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45004 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45007 \begin_layout Description
45009 \begin_inset space ~
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45016 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45020 \begin_layout Description
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45029 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45030 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45033 \begin_layout Description
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45046 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45047 \begin_inset space ~
45053 \begin_layout Description
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45067 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45070 \begin_layout Description
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45079 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45080 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45081 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45082 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45093 \begin_layout Description
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45102 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45103 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45104 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45106 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45117 \begin_layout Description
45119 \begin_inset space ~
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45126 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45129 \begin_layout Description
45131 \begin_inset space ~
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45138 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45141 \begin_layout Description
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45150 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45153 \begin_layout Description
45155 \begin_inset space ~
45158 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45161 \begin_layout Description
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45169 \begin_layout Description
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45178 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45181 \begin_layout Description
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45193 \begin_layout Description
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45202 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45205 \begin_layout Description
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_layout Description
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45226 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45232 \begin_inset Index idx
45235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45242 , when using this, set the document language to
45247 \begin_layout Description
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45256 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45261 , when using this, set the document language to
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_layout Description
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45279 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45285 \begin_inset Index idx
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45290 packages ! japanese
45295 , when using this, set the document language to
45300 \begin_layout Description
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45309 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45314 , when using this, set the document language to
45319 \begin_layout Description
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45325 \begin_inset space ~
45328 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45333 , when using this, set the document language to
45338 \begin_layout Description
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45343 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45346 \begin_layout Description
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45352 \begin_inset space ~
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45359 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45362 \begin_layout Description
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset space ~
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45375 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45376 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45377 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45380 \begin_layout Description
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45392 \begin_layout Description
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45401 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45402 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45405 \begin_layout Description
45407 \begin_inset space ~
45411 \begin_inset space ~
45414 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45420 \begin_inset Index idx
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45430 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45433 \begin_layout Description
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45443 \begin_inset space ~
45446 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45453 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45456 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45463 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45464 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45466 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45469 \begin_layout Description
45471 \begin_inset space ~
45475 \begin_inset space ~
45478 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45484 \begin_inset Index idx
45487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45497 \begin_layout Description
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45502 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45508 \begin_inset Index idx
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45513 packages ! inputenc
45519 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45523 \begin_layout Description
45525 \begin_inset space ~
45529 \begin_inset space ~
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45536 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45537 \begin_inset space ~
45543 \begin_layout Description
45545 \begin_inset space ~
45549 \begin_inset space ~
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45556 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45557 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45558 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45562 \begin_layout Description
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45572 \begin_inset space ~
45575 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45576 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45579 \begin_layout Section
45581 \begin_inset Index idx
45584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 \begin_inset Index idx
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45601 \begin_inset Index idx
45604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 Color ! Shaded boxes
45611 \begin_inset Index idx
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45623 \begin_layout Standard
45624 Here you can alter the font color for the
45628 (default: black), for
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45636 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45640 (default: white) and for
45643 \begin_inset space ~
45653 sets the color back to the default.
45656 \begin_layout Standard
45657 Clicking any button showing
45665 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45666 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45667 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45668 later more quickly.
45671 \begin_layout Standard
45672 Note, if you change the
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45680 font color and use the option
45683 \begin_inset space ~
45688 in the document settings under
45691 \begin_inset space ~
45696 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45703 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45710 \begin_layout Standard
45711 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45717 \begin_layout Standard
45721 \begin_inset space ~
45730 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45733 \begin_inset space ~
45736 Code after a forced page break:
45739 \begin_layout Itemize
45740 For the page color:
45741 \begin_inset Newline newline
45748 pagecolor{color name}
45751 \begin_layout Itemize
45752 For the text color:
45753 \begin_inset Newline newline
45763 \begin_layout Standard
45764 You are restricted to one of
45800 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45807 \begin_inset space ~
45813 \begin_inset Newline newline
45816 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45817 names to refer to them:
45820 \begin_layout Itemize
45826 \begin_inset Newline newline
45831 page_backgroundcolor
45834 \begin_layout Itemize
45838 \begin_inset space ~
45844 \begin_inset Newline newline
45852 \begin_layout Itemize
45856 \begin_inset space ~
45862 \begin_inset Newline newline
45870 \begin_layout Itemize
45874 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_inset Newline newline
45888 \begin_layout Standard
45889 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
45892 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45908 \begin_layout Section
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45913 Here you can adjust the
45917 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45921 as described in section
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45928 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45935 \begin_layout Section
45939 \begin_layout Standard
45940 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45946 \begin_inset Index idx
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 packages ! biblatex
45961 \begin_inset Index idx
45964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 \begin_inset Index idx
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45990 Sectioned bibliography
45992 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45998 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 packages ! bibtopic
46013 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46014 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46018 for the generation of the bibliography.
46019 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46020 \begin_inset space ~
46024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46026 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46033 \begin_layout Section
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46038 Here you can define the
46042 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46044 \begin_inset space ~
46048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46050 reference "sec:Index"
46057 \begin_layout Section
46061 \begin_layout Standard
46062 The PDF properties are explained in section
46063 \begin_inset space ~
46067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46069 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46076 \begin_layout Section
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46081 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46082 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46088 \begin_inset Index idx
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46103 \begin_inset Index idx
46106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 \begin_inset Index idx
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46133 \begin_inset Index idx
46136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 \begin_inset Index idx
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46153 packages ! mathdots
46163 \begin_inset Index idx
46166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 packages ! mathtools
46178 \begin_inset Index idx
46181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46193 \begin_inset Index idx
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 packages ! stackrel
46208 \begin_inset Index idx
46211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 packages ! stmaryrd
46223 \begin_inset Index idx
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 packages ! undertilde
46233 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46236 \begin_layout Description
46237 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46238 -errors in formulas,
46239 ensure that you have this enabled.
46242 \begin_layout Description
46243 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46244 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46245 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46249 \begin_layout Description
46250 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46265 \begin_layout Description
46266 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46269 \begin_inset space ~
46281 \begin_layout Description
46282 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46293 \begin_layout Description
46294 mathtools is used for the math commands
46330 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46337 \begin_layout Description
46338 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46340 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46349 \begin_layout Description
46350 stackrel is used for the math command
46367 \begin_layout Description
46368 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46371 \begin_layout Description
46372 undertilde is used for the math command
46380 Accents for one Character
46389 \begin_layout Section
46391 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46393 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46399 \begin_layout Standard
46401 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46402 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46407 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46408 The float placement options
46409 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46412 are described in the section
46415 \begin_inset space ~
46419 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46421 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46437 \begin_layout Section
46441 \begin_layout Standard
46442 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46444 Program Code Listings
46449 \begin_inset space ~
46457 \begin_layout Section
46461 \begin_layout Standard
46462 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46470 set to be used and set the
46475 The itemize environment is described in section
46476 \begin_inset space ~
46480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46482 reference "sec:Itemize"
46489 \begin_layout Standard
46490 You can furthermore specify a
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46498 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46499 command of the desired character.
46500 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46507 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46513 \begin_inset space \space{}
46517 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46527 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46528 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46531 \begin_layout Standard
46532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46540 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46541 -packages in the preamble (menu
46544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46554 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46558 usepackage{textcomp}
46561 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46565 usepackage{amssymb}
46575 \begin_layout Section
46579 \begin_layout Standard
46580 Branches are described in section
46581 \begin_inset space ~
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46587 reference "sec:Branches"
46594 \begin_layout Section
46596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46598 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46605 \begin_layout Standard
46606 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46609 \begin_layout Description
46611 \begin_inset space ~
46615 \begin_inset space ~
46618 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46638 View Master Document
46639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46646 Update Master Document
46647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46654 menu or the toolbar.
46655 The default is set in
46657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46658 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46660 \begin_inset space ~
46663 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46667 \begin_inset space ~
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46673 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46680 \begin_layout Description
46682 \begin_inset space ~
46686 \begin_inset space ~
46689 Output settings for the menu
46691 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46693 \begin_inset space ~
46699 For a detailed description see section
46701 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46714 \begin_layout Description
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46720 \begin_inset space ~
46723 Options offers settings for the export format
46731 \begin_inset space ~
46736 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46737 \begin_inset space ~
46740 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46749 settings are described in detail in section
46751 Math Output in XHTML
46756 \begin_inset space ~
46765 \begin_inset space ~
46769 \begin_inset space ~
46774 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46777 \begin_layout Description
46779 \begin_inset space ~
46784 Save transient properties
46786 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46787 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46788 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46792 \begin_layout Itemize
46793 the activation of change tracking
46796 \begin_layout Itemize
46797 the output of tracked changes
46800 \begin_layout Itemize
46801 the recording of the document directory path.
46804 \begin_layout Standard
46805 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46806 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46810 \begin_layout Section
46818 \begin_layout Standard
46819 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46821 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46823 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46825 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
46829 \begin_layout Standard
46830 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46831 -syntax is given in section
46832 \begin_inset space ~
46836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46838 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
46845 \begin_layout Chapter
46851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46853 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
46858 \begin_inset Index idx
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46870 \begin_layout Standard
46871 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
46873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46877 It has the following submenus.
46880 \begin_layout Section
46884 \begin_layout Subsection
46888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46889 User Interface File
46890 \begin_inset Index idx
46893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46894 Customization ! of toolbars
46900 \begin_inset Index idx
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46904 Customization ! of menus
46912 \begin_layout Standard
46913 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
46914 interface (ui) file.
46915 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
46923 \begin_layout Description
46928 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46931 \begin_layout Description
46938 the menu entries in popup context menus
46941 \begin_layout Description
46946 specifies the toolbar buttons
46949 \begin_layout Standard
46950 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46951 and edit the entries.
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46955 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46967 entries must be finished with an explicit
46992 and in the case of the
46993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47005 The syntax for the entries is:
47008 \begin_layout Standard
47009 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47038 \begin_layout Standard
47040 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47043 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47044 -functions are listed in the menu
47046 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47048 \begin_inset space ~
47056 \begin_layout Standard
47057 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47063 \begin_layout Standard
47064 For example, assuming you use the menu
47066 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47069 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47073 \begin_layout Standard
47074 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47098 \begin_layout Standard
47100 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47115 to have the sixth bookmark.
47118 \begin_layout Standard
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47127 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47128 's toolbar buttons.
47129 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47133 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47141 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47145 \begin_layout Standard
47148 Enable tool tips in main work area
47150 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47158 \begin_layout Standard
47163 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47164 should display in the menu
47166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47176 \begin_layout Subsection
47180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47184 \begin_layout Standard
47187 Restore window layouts and geometries
47190 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47191 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47195 \begin_layout Standard
47198 Restore cursor positions
47200 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47204 \begin_layout Standard
47207 Load opened files from last session
47209 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47213 \begin_layout Standard
47216 Clear all session information
47218 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47219 sessions (cursor positions, names
47220 of last opened documents, etc.).
47223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47227 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47232 \begin_inset Index idx
47235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47244 \begin_layout Standard
47247 Backup original documents when saving
47249 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47250 it was saved the last time.
47251 It is stored in the
47254 \begin_inset space ~
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47266 reference "sec:Paths"
47270 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47273 \begin_inset space ~
47279 The backup file has the file extension
47280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47294 \begin_layout Standard
47297 Backup documents, every
47299 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47302 \begin_layout Standard
47305 Save documents compressed by default
47307 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47308 \begin_inset space ~
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47314 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47319 This applies to newly created documents only.
47320 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47324 Windows & work area
47327 \begin_layout Standard
47330 Open documents in tabs
47332 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47336 \begin_layout Standard
47341 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47348 \begin_inset space ~
47352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47354 reference "sec:Paths"
47358 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47365 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47366 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47367 of \SpecialChar LyX
47369 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47370 instance is created for each file.
47373 \begin_layout Standard
47376 Single close-tab button
47378 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47388 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47389 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47390 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47394 \begin_layout Standard
47395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47403 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47404 before the change takes effect.
47412 \begin_layout Standard
47417 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47419 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47421 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47425 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47426 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47427 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47430 \begin_layout Subsection
47432 \begin_inset Index idx
47435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47444 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47451 \begin_layout Standard
47452 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47456 \begin_layout Standard
47457 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47465 This section only deals with the fonts
47469 the \SpecialChar LyX
47471 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47475 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47486 \begin_layout Standard
47487 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47504 (depends on the system) as its
47507 \begin_inset space ~
47523 \begin_layout Standard
47524 You can change the font size with the
47531 \begin_layout Standard
47536 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47541 points have the size of 1
47542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47552 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47557 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47562 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47569 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47576 \begin_layout Subsection
47578 \begin_inset Index idx
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47582 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47589 \begin_inset Index idx
47592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47601 \begin_layout Standard
47602 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47603 by choosing an item in the
47604 list and selecting the
47611 \begin_layout Standard
47612 By checking the option
47616 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47619 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47620 \begin_inset space ~
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47629 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47632 \begin_layout Subsection
47634 \begin_inset Index idx
47637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 \begin_layout Standard
47647 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47651 \begin_layout Standard
47656 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47657 This feature is described in section
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47664 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47671 \begin_layout Standard
47672 Checking the option
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47688 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47691 \begin_layout Section
47693 \begin_inset Index idx
47696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47705 \begin_layout Subsection
47709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47713 \begin_layout Standard
47716 Cursor follows scrollbar
47718 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47722 \begin_layout Standard
47723 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47724 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47725 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47728 \begin_layout Standard
47731 Scroll below end of document
47733 is self-explanatory.
47736 \begin_layout Standard
47737 In \SpecialChar LyX
47738 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47745 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47747 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47748 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47751 \begin_layout Standard
47754 Sort environments alphabetically
47756 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47759 \begin_layout Standard
47762 Group environments by their category
47764 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47767 \begin_layout Standard
47772 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47787 \begin_layout Standard
47788 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47793 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47794 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47798 \begin_layout Subsection
47800 \begin_inset Index idx
47803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47810 \begin_inset Index idx
47813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47814 Settings ! Shortcuts
47822 \begin_layout Standard
47827 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47829 Several binding files are available, among them:
47832 \begin_layout Description
47833 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47836 \begin_layout Description
47837 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
47849 \begin_layout Description
47850 mac.bind a set of bindings for
47853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47861 \begin_layout Standard
47862 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
47867 , and binding files for special languages.
47868 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
47869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47873 \begin_inset space \space{}
47877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47885 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
47886 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
47887 will try to use the appropriate binding
47891 \begin_layout Standard
47892 Some binding files, like
47896 , only have a limited scope.
47897 When looking at the end of the file
47901 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47908 \begin_inset space ~
47912 \begin_inset space ~
47917 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47918 in the selected key binding file.
47921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47925 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47930 \begin_inset Index idx
47933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47934 Key Bindings ! Editing
47942 \begin_layout Standard
47943 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47944 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47945 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47946 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47949 Show key-bindings containing
47952 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47953 Insert there for example as keyword
47954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47961 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47962 functions that contain
47963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47971 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47972 All \SpecialChar LyX
47973 functions are also listed in the file
47978 that you will find in the
47985 \begin_layout Standard
47986 For example, to add the shortcut
47994 , select the function and press the
47999 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48000 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48003 \begin_layout Standard
48004 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48005 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48007 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48008 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48010 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48015 \begin_layout Standard
48016 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48019 \begin_layout Standard
48020 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48022 The syntax of the entries is:
48025 \begin_layout Standard
48031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48050 \begin_layout Standard
48051 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48052 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48080 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48081 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48082 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48083 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48085 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48089 , you needed to specify it as
48094 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48097 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48100 \begin_layout Subsection
48102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48104 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48109 \begin_inset Index idx
48112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48119 \begin_inset Index idx
48122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48123 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48131 \begin_layout Standard
48132 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48133 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48134 provides keyboard maps.
48135 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48136 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48148 and select the keyboard map file named
48155 \begin_layout Standard
48164 keyboard map and, if you use the
48168 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48171 arg "keymap-primary"
48177 arg "keymap-secondary"
48180 respectively or toggle between them with
48183 arg "keymap-toggle"
48189 \begin_layout Standard
48190 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48198 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48207 \begin_layout Standard
48208 You can also specify the mouse
48210 Wheel scrolling speed
48213 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48217 Middle mouse button pasting
48219 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48220 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48223 \begin_layout Standard
48231 \begin_inset space ~
48235 \begin_inset space ~
48240 you can select a key for zooming.
48241 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48244 \begin_layout Subsection
48248 \begin_layout Standard
48249 Input completion is described in section
48250 \begin_inset space ~
48254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48256 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48263 \begin_layout Section
48265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48272 \begin_inset Index idx
48275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48282 \begin_inset Index idx
48285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48294 \begin_layout Standard
48295 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48296 are normally determined during
48298 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48301 \begin_layout Description
48303 \begin_inset space ~
48306 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48307 's working directory.
48308 It is the default when you
48319 \begin_inset space ~
48327 \begin_layout Description
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48332 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48336 \begin_inset space ~
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48348 \begin_layout Description
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48353 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48359 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48363 \begin_inset Newline newline
48367 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48379 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48380 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48388 \begin_layout Description
48390 \begin_inset space ~
48394 \begin_inset Index idx
48397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48403 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48404 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48405 \begin_inset space ~
48409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48411 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48419 will be used to save the backups.
48420 \begin_inset Newline newline
48423 Backup files have the ending
48424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48434 \begin_layout Description
48436 \begin_inset space ~
48439 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48440 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48442 \begin_inset Newline newline
48449 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48455 You can edit this file with the program
48464 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48465 in its preferences under
48468 \begin_inset space ~
48474 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48479 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48481 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48482 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48488 and \SpecialChar LyX
48489 need to be running the same time.
48490 \begin_inset Newline newline
48493 The pipe is also used for the
48497 feature, see section
48498 \begin_inset space ~
48502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48504 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48509 \begin_inset Newline newline
48512 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48513 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48514 \begin_inset Newline newline
48530 \begin_layout Description
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48535 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48538 \begin_layout Description
48540 \begin_inset space ~
48543 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48544 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48545 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48548 \begin_layout Description
48550 \begin_inset space ~
48553 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48559 You only need to specify it if you are using
48563 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48565 For \SpecialChar LyX
48570 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48574 \begin_layout Description
48576 \begin_inset space ~
48579 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48580 When \SpecialChar LyX
48581 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48582 to find it on the system.
48583 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48585 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48594 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48595 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48598 \begin_layout Description
48600 \begin_inset space ~
48603 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48604 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48605 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48606 code or in the document
48608 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48610 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48611 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48612 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48613 scanned for the input files.
48614 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48615 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48617 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48618 compilation may fail for some documents.
48621 \begin_layout Section
48625 \begin_layout Standard
48626 Here you can insert your
48635 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48637 \begin_inset space ~
48641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48643 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48647 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48650 \begin_layout Section
48652 \begin_inset Index idx
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 Language ! Settings
48662 \begin_inset Index idx
48665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48666 Settings ! Language
48674 \begin_layout Subsection
48676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48678 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48685 \begin_layout Description
48687 \begin_inset space ~
48691 \begin_inset space ~
48694 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48696 You can find its actual translation status here:
48697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48699 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48707 \begin_layout Description
48709 \begin_inset space ~
48712 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48713 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48714 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48715 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48732 The most widespread language package is
48737 \begin_inset Index idx
48740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48749 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48750 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48751 come with the alternative
48757 \begin_inset Index idx
48760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 packages ! polyglossia
48767 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48768 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48774 The available selections are described in section
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48781 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48788 \begin_layout Description
48790 \begin_inset space ~
48793 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48794 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48795 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48796 An example is the start command
48802 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48804 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48824 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48829 \begin_layout Description
48831 \begin_inset space ~
48839 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
48840 command toggles the package on and off.
48843 \begin_layout Description
48845 \begin_inset space ~
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48852 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
48856 \begin_layout Description
48858 \begin_inset space ~
48862 \begin_inset space ~
48865 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
48869 \begin_layout Description
48871 \begin_inset space ~
48875 \begin_inset space ~
48878 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
48879 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
48880 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
48882 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
48889 \begin_layout Description
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48894 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
48896 When this option is not set, the
48899 \begin_inset space ~
48904 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48906 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
48909 \begin_inset space ~
48917 \begin_layout Description
48919 \begin_inset space ~
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48931 When it is not set, the
48934 \begin_inset space ~
48939 is set to the end of the document.
48942 \begin_layout Description
48944 \begin_inset space ~
48948 \begin_inset space ~
48951 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48952 language will be underlined in blue.
48955 \begin_layout Description
48957 \begin_inset space ~
48961 \begin_inset space ~
48964 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48965 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48968 \begin_layout Description
48970 \begin_inset space ~
48973 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48974 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48975 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48976 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48979 \begin_layout Subsection
48983 \begin_layout Standard
48984 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48985 \begin_inset space ~
48989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48991 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48998 \begin_layout Section
49002 \begin_layout Subsection
49004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49006 name "subsec:General-output"
49013 \begin_layout Description
49015 \begin_inset space ~
49018 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49020 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49022 \begin_inset space ~
49028 For a detailed description see section
49030 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49035 \begin_inset space ~
49043 \begin_layout Description
49045 \begin_inset space ~
49048 Options Options for the program
49052 that is used for the export format
49057 \begin_inset space ~
49061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49063 reference "subsec:Export"
49068 Possible options are listed in the
49073 \begin_inset Newline newline
49077 \begin_inset Flex URL
49080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49082 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49092 \begin_layout Description
49094 \begin_inset space ~
49098 \begin_inset space ~
49101 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49104 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49105 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49107 \begin_inset space ~
49113 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49116 \begin_layout Description
49118 \begin_inset space ~
49122 \begin_inset Index idx
49125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49132 \begin_inset Index idx
49135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49136 Settings ! Date format
49141 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49142 \begin_inset Newline newline
49146 \begin_inset Flex URL
49149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49151 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49157 \begin_inset Newline newline
49160 For example the format
49161 \begin_inset Newline newline
49165 \begin_inset Newline newline
49168 prints the date as day/month/year.
49171 \begin_layout Description
49173 \begin_inset space ~
49177 \begin_inset space ~
49180 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49181 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49184 \begin_layout Subsection
49190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49192 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49197 \begin_inset Index idx
49200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49201 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49210 \begin_layout Description
49212 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49214 \begin_inset space ~
49222 \begin_inset space ~
49226 \begin_inset space ~
49229 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49234 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49255 are used for Cyrillic.
49256 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49269 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49271 sets up in the background.
49272 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49277 \begin_layout Description
49279 \begin_inset space ~
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49287 \begin_inset space ~
49291 \begin_inset space ~
49294 options They only have an effect when the program
49298 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49301 \begin_layout Standard
49302 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49303 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49304 manuals of the applications.
49307 \begin_layout Description
49309 \begin_inset space ~
49312 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49313 \begin_inset space ~
49317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49319 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49326 \begin_layout Description
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49331 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49332 \begin_inset space ~
49336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49338 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49345 \begin_layout Description
49347 \begin_inset space ~
49350 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49351 \begin_inset space ~
49355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49357 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49364 \begin_layout Description
49370 \begin_inset space ~
49373 command Command for the program
49375 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49378 that is described in the section
49380 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49385 Additional Features
49390 \begin_layout Standard
49391 There are additionally the following options:
49394 \begin_layout Description
49396 \begin_inset space ~
49400 \begin_inset space ~
49404 \begin_inset space ~
49408 \begin_inset space ~
49413 \begin_inset space ~
49416 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49434 to separate folders.
49435 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49437 \begin_inset Index idx
49440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49447 \begin_inset Index idx
49450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49459 \begin_layout Description
49461 \begin_inset space ~
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49469 \begin_inset space ~
49473 \begin_inset space ~
49477 \begin_inset space ~
49481 \begin_inset space ~
49484 changes Removes all manually set
49490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49498 dialog when changing the document class.
49501 \begin_layout Section
49503 \begin_inset space ~
49507 \begin_inset Index idx
49510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49519 \begin_layout Subsection
49521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49523 name "subsec:Converters"
49528 \begin_inset Index idx
49531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 \begin_layout Standard
49541 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49542 from one format to another.
49543 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49544 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49551 \begin_inset space ~
49556 field and press the
49561 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49565 \begin_inset space ~
49570 drop-down list, modify the
49574 field and press the
49581 \begin_layout Standard
49584 Converter File Cache
49590 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49592 Maximum Age (in days
49595 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49596 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49599 \begin_layout Standard
49600 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49601 definition, is described in the section
49612 \begin_layout Subsection
49614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49616 name "sec:File-Formats"
49621 \begin_inset Index idx
49624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49631 \begin_inset Index idx
49634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49643 \begin_layout Standard
49644 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49654 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49657 \begin_layout Standard
49658 You can also define the
49660 Default output format
49662 that is used when you use
49664 View, Update, View Master Document
49668 Update Master Document
49674 menu or the toolbar.
49677 \begin_layout Standard
49678 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49689 \begin_layout Standard
49690 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49692 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49693 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49694 This is done by specifying a
49699 More about this is described in the section
49710 \begin_layout Chapter
49711 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49713 \begin_inset Index idx
49716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49725 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49732 \begin_layout Standard
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49740 reference "tab:Units"
49744 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49745 and used in this documentation.
49748 \begin_layout Standard
49749 \begin_inset Float table
49755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49756 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49782 \begin_inset Tabular
49783 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49784 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49785 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49786 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49940 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50211 scaled point (65536
50212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50279 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50403 % of original image width
50408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50492 \begin_layout Standard
50493 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50496 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50503 \begin_layout Bibliography
50504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50505 LatexCommand bibitem
50512 The \SpecialChar LyX
50514 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50517 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50523 \begin_inset Newline newline
50527 \begin_inset Flex URL
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50532 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50540 \begin_layout Bibliography
50541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50542 LatexCommand bibitem
50543 key "latexcompanion"
50548 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50550 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50551 Companion Second Edition.
50554 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50557 \begin_layout Bibliography
50558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50559 LatexCommand bibitem
50565 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50568 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50572 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50575 \begin_layout Bibliography
50576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50577 LatexCommand bibitem
50586 : A Document Preparation System.
50589 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50592 \begin_layout Bibliography
50593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50594 LatexCommand bibitem
50604 The \SpecialChar TeX
50608 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50611 \begin_layout Bibliography
50612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50613 LatexCommand bibitem
50619 The \SpecialChar TeX
50621 \begin_inset Newline newline
50625 \begin_inset Flex URL
50628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50630 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50638 \begin_layout Bibliography
50639 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50640 LatexCommand bibitem
50646 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50648 \begin_inset Newline newline
50652 \begin_inset Flex URL
50655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50657 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50665 \begin_layout Bibliography
50666 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50667 LatexCommand bibitem
50674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50676 name "Documentation"
50677 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50684 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50688 \begin_inset Newline newline
50692 \begin_inset Flex URL
50695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50697 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50705 \begin_layout Bibliography
50706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50707 LatexCommand bibitem
50714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50716 name "Documentation"
50717 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50722 how to use the program
50724 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50728 \begin_inset Newline newline
50732 \begin_inset Flex URL
50735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50737 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50745 \begin_layout Bibliography
50746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50747 LatexCommand bibitem
50754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50756 name "Documentation"
50757 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50762 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50768 \begin_inset Index idx
50771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50773 packages ! biblatex
50779 \begin_inset Newline newline
50783 \begin_inset Flex URL
50786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50788 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50796 \begin_layout Bibliography
50797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50798 LatexCommand bibitem
50805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50807 name "Documentation"
50808 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50813 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50819 \begin_inset Index idx
50822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50830 \begin_inset Newline newline
50834 \begin_inset Flex URL
50837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50839 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50847 \begin_layout Bibliography
50848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50849 LatexCommand bibitem
50856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50858 name "Documentation"
50859 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50869 \begin_inset Newline newline
50873 \begin_inset Flex URL
50876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50886 \begin_layout Bibliography
50887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50888 LatexCommand bibitem
50889 key "makeindex-man"
50895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50898 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50908 \begin_inset Newline newline
50912 \begin_inset Flex URL
50915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50917 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50925 \begin_layout Bibliography
50926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50927 LatexCommand bibitem
50934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50936 name "Documentation"
50937 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50947 \begin_inset Newline newline
50951 \begin_inset Flex URL
50954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50956 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50964 \begin_layout Bibliography
50965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50966 LatexCommand bibitem
50973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50975 name "Documentation"
50976 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50981 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50983 \begin_inset Newline newline
50987 \begin_inset Flex URL
50990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50992 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51000 \begin_layout Bibliography
51001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51002 LatexCommand bibitem
51009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51011 name "Documentation"
51012 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51017 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51023 \begin_inset Index idx
51026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51034 \begin_inset Newline newline
51038 \begin_inset Flex URL
51041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51043 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51051 \begin_layout Bibliography
51052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51053 LatexCommand bibitem
51060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51062 name "Documentation"
51063 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51068 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51074 \begin_inset Index idx
51077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51079 packages ! enumitem
51085 \begin_inset Newline newline
51089 \begin_inset Flex URL
51092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51094 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51102 \begin_layout Bibliography
51103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51104 LatexCommand bibitem
51111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51113 name "Documentation"
51114 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51119 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51125 \begin_inset Index idx
51128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51130 packages ! fancyhdr
51136 \begin_inset Newline newline
51140 \begin_inset Flex URL
51143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51145 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51153 \begin_layout Bibliography
51154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51155 LatexCommand bibitem
51162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51164 name "Documentation"
51165 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51170 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51176 \begin_inset Index idx
51179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51181 packages ! hyperref
51187 \begin_inset Newline newline
51191 \begin_inset Flex URL
51194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51196 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51204 \begin_layout Bibliography
51205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51206 LatexCommand bibitem
51213 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51215 name "Documentation"
51216 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51221 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51227 \begin_inset Index idx
51230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51232 packages ! microtpye
51238 \begin_inset Newline newline
51242 \begin_inset Flex URL
51245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51247 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51255 \begin_layout Bibliography
51256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51257 LatexCommand bibitem
51264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51266 name "Documentation"
51267 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51272 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51278 \begin_inset Index idx
51281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51289 \begin_inset Newline newline
51293 \begin_inset Flex URL
51296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51298 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51306 \begin_layout Bibliography
51307 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51308 LatexCommand bibitem
51315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51317 name "Documentation"
51318 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51323 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51329 \begin_inset Index idx
51332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51334 packages ! prettyref
51340 \begin_inset Newline newline
51344 \begin_inset Flex URL
51347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51349 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51357 \begin_layout Bibliography
51358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51359 LatexCommand bibitem
51366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51368 name "Documentation"
51369 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51374 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51380 \begin_inset Index idx
51383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51385 packages ! refstyle
51391 \begin_inset Newline newline
51395 \begin_inset Flex URL
51398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51400 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51408 \begin_layout Bibliography
51409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51410 LatexCommand bibitem
51417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51420 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51425 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51427 \begin_inset Newline newline
51431 \begin_inset Flex URL
51434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51436 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51444 \begin_layout Bibliography
51445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51446 LatexCommand bibitem
51453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51456 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51461 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51463 \begin_inset Newline newline
51467 \begin_inset Flex URL
51470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51472 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51480 \begin_layout Bibliography
51481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51482 LatexCommand bibitem
51489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51492 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51497 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51498 for Cyrillic languages:
51499 \begin_inset Newline newline
51503 \begin_inset Flex URL
51506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51508 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51516 \begin_layout Bibliography
51517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51518 LatexCommand bibitem
51525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51528 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51533 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51535 \begin_inset Newline newline
51539 \begin_inset Flex URL
51542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51544 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51552 \begin_layout Bibliography
51553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51554 LatexCommand bibitem
51561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51564 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51569 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51571 \begin_inset Newline newline
51575 \begin_inset Flex URL
51578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51580 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51588 \begin_layout Bibliography
51589 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51590 LatexCommand bibitem
51597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51600 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51605 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51607 \begin_inset Newline newline
51611 \begin_inset Flex URL
51614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51616 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51624 \begin_layout Standard
51625 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51659 \begin_inset Note Note
51662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51669 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51670 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51671 bibliography is the second one:
51679 \begin_layout Standard
51680 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51681 LatexCommand bibtex
51682 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51683 options "biblio/alphadin"
51690 \begin_layout Standard
51691 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51695 \begin_layout Standard
51699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51705 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51714 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51722 \begin_inset Note Note
51725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51726 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51727 \begin_inset space ~
51731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51733 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51745 \begin_layout Standard
51746 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51747 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51753 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51754 LatexCommand printindex